[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025077590A1 - Service transmission method and apparatus - Google Patents

Service transmission method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025077590A1
WO2025077590A1 PCT/CN2024/121475 CN2024121475W WO2025077590A1 WO 2025077590 A1 WO2025077590 A1 WO 2025077590A1 CN 2024121475 W CN2024121475 W CN 2024121475W WO 2025077590 A1 WO2025077590 A1 WO 2025077590A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
channel
ppdu
information
site
station
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2024/121475
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
郭宇宸
霍罗夫埃夫根尼·米哈伊洛维奇
李云波
淦明
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025077590A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025077590A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and more specifically, to a service transmission method and device.
  • the impact on the original transmission can be reduced by reducing the transmission channel of the original service to maintain the continued transmission of the original service.
  • the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:
  • the sending site receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.
  • the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.
  • the fourth channel used by the first station to send the first information is occupied too much, resulting in the interruption of the original transmission.
  • the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information on the main channel; the method also includes: the first site sends second information, the second information is used to indicate switching the main channel of the first site, and the second channel includes the main channel of the first site after switching.
  • the second information may be carried in any wireless frame of the sending station for transmission, and this application does not limit this.
  • the second information may be carried in at least one second PPDU for transmission, and more specifically, the second information may be carried in The at least one second PPDU is sent in the first second PPDU.
  • the at least one second PPDU may further include second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel.
  • the first site receives third information from the second site, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel.
  • the negotiation process of the above-mentioned method three only needs to be completed before the second site needs to transmit the above-mentioned at least one third PPDU, and the specific negotiation time is not limited in this application.
  • a service transmission method which can be executed by the first site, or by a module (such as a chip or circuit) in the first site, or by a logical node, logical module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first site, and the present application does not limit this.
  • the method includes: the first station uses a first channel to transmit at least one first PPDU to a third station based on a first parameter, and the first parameter includes a power for transmitting the at least one first PPDU or a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for transmitting the at least one first PPDU; the first station receives first information, and the first information is used to indicate that the second station requests to transmit a service; the first station uses the first channel to transmit at least one second PPDU to the third station based on a second parameter, and the first parameter includes a power for transmitting the at least one second PPDU or a MCS for transmitting the at least one second PPDU.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the at least one second PPDU may be a PPDU belonging to the same service as the at least one first PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU may also be a PPDU of a new service, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the above-mentioned first information may be a preemptive signal.
  • the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:
  • the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at the first time interval.
  • the sending site receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.
  • the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at the first time interval.
  • the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.
  • the sending site i.e., the first site
  • the preemptive site i.e., the second site
  • the above-mentioned first information may be a preemptive signal.
  • the sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information is not limited.
  • the second site sending the first information to the first site includes: The first station sends the first information at a first time interval.
  • the first time interval is the time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU
  • the second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the second channel
  • the second channel is a part of the first channel.
  • the above-mentioned “the second channel is a part of the first channel” can be understood as the above-mentioned second channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the bandwidth of the above-mentioned second channel is a part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel are a part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the above-mentioned second channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel, etc.
  • the at least one second PPDU may be a PPDU belonging to the same service as the at least one first PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU may also be a PPDU of a new service, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the sending site receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.
  • time interval #1 between any two adjacent first PPDUs in the at least one first PPDU mentioned above, so there are multiple time intervals #1 between at least one first PPDU, and the multiple time intervals #1 are PROPs, and the first time interval mentioned above can be one of the PROPs.
  • the transmission period of the at least one first PPDU mentioned above may be considered as PP, and the PP may also be understood as the period of PROP.
  • the sending site receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.
  • the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.
  • the sending site i.e., the first site
  • the preemptive site i.e., the second site
  • the preemptive station ie, the second station
  • the preemptive station can indicate the channel on which it wants to preempt transmission through a channel carrying a preemptive signal, which can ensure that the preemptive transmission is carried out and that the original transmission is not interrupted.
  • the fourth channel is in the high frequency band of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel.
  • the fourth channel used by the first station to send the first information is occupied too much, resulting in the interruption of the original transmission.
  • the second information is also used to indicate the primary channel of the first site after the switch.
  • the above three methods can enable the second station to learn the third channel, thereby ensuring normal preemptive transmission.
  • the method includes: the second station sends first information to the first station, and the first information is used to indicate that the second station requests to transmit a service; the second station uses the above-mentioned first channel to transmit at least one third PPDU based on a third parameter, and the third parameter includes a first power for transmitting at least one third PPDU or a first MCS for transmitting at least one third PPDU.
  • the first information is also used to indicate that the second site requests to use the first channel.
  • the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:
  • the above time interval can also be understood as a time window.
  • the first time interval is the time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU
  • the second PPDU is the time interval between the first station and the third station in The PPDU transmitted on the above first channel.
  • the at least one second PPDU may be a PPDU belonging to the same service as the at least one first PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU may also be a PPDU of a new service, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU
  • the at least one second PPDU is the PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the first channel.
  • time interval #1 between any two adjacent first PPDUs in the at least one first PPDU mentioned above, so there are multiple time intervals #1 between at least one first PPDU, and the multiple time intervals #1 are PROPs, and the first time interval mentioned above can be one of the PROPs.
  • the sending site receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.
  • the second station sending the first information at the first time interval includes: the second station sending the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first station to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first station to switch from a receiving state to a sending state.
  • the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.
  • the sending site i.e., the first site
  • the preemptive site i.e., the second site
  • a service transmission device which includes: a transceiver unit for transmitting at least one first PPDU with a third site using a first channel; the transceiver unit is also used to receive first information, which is used to indicate that the second site requests service transmission; the transceiver unit is also used to transmit at least one second PPDU with the above-mentioned third site using a second channel, and the second channel is part of the above-mentioned first channel.
  • the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:
  • the sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information is not limited.
  • the transceiver unit when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, there is a first time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in the first time interval.
  • the above-mentioned first time interval also includes a second time and a third time
  • the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the above-mentioned device to switch from a sending state to a receiving state
  • the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the above-mentioned device to switch from a receiving state to a sending state
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in a time interval other than the above-mentioned second time and the above-mentioned third time in the first time interval.
  • the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: The unit is used to receive the above-mentioned first information on a fourth channel, and the fourth channel is a part of the above-mentioned first channel; the above-mentioned device also includes: a processing unit, which is used to determine that the channel other than the above-mentioned fourth channel in the above-mentioned first channel is the above-mentioned second channel.
  • the second information is also used to indicate a primary channel of the device after switching.
  • the first information is further used to indicate that the second station requests to use a third channel, which is a part of the first channel.
  • the third channel requested to be used by the second station can be determined in the following three ways:
  • Mode 1 The third channel is predefined based on the first channel.
  • the third indication information may be carried in part or all of the at least one first PPDU.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the first PPDU sent among the at least one first PPDU.
  • Mode 3 The device and the second station determine the third channel through negotiation, and the specific steps are as follows:
  • the configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel.
  • the transceiver unit is used to receive third information from the second site, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel.
  • the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:
  • the above-mentioned first time interval also includes a second time and a third time
  • the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a sending state to a receiving state
  • the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a receiving state to a sending state
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in a time interval other than the above-mentioned second time and the above-mentioned third time in the first time interval.
  • the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:
  • the sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information is not limited.
  • the first time interval is the time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU
  • the second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the second channel
  • the second channel is a part of the first channel.
  • the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU
  • the at least one second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the second channel
  • the second channel is a part of the first channel
  • the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site on a fourth channel.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit when the main channel of the above-mentioned first site is the same as the main channel of the above-mentioned device, the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site on the main channel; the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to receive second information from the first site, and the second information is used to indicate switching the main channel of the first site, and the second channel includes the main channel of the first site after switching.
  • the second information is also used to indicate the primary channel of the first site after the switch.
  • the third channel requested to be used by the above device can be determined in the following three ways:
  • the above-mentioned device further includes: a processing unit, configured to determine a third channel according to the above-mentioned first channel.
  • the third indication information may be carried in part or all of the at least one first PPDU.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the first PPDU sent among the at least one first PPDU.
  • Method 3 The first station and the device determine the third channel through negotiation, and the specific steps are as follows:
  • the transceiver unit is used to receive fourth information from the first site, where the fourth information is used to indicate configuration information of the third channel.
  • the configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel.
  • the transceiver unit is further used to send third information to the first site, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel.
  • the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the transceiver unit is used to send the first information at a first time interval.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, which is used to input and/or output signals.
  • a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the method described in the first aspect and any possibility of the first aspect to be executed; or, cause the method described in the second aspect and any possibility of the second aspect to be executed; cause the method described in the third aspect and any possibility of the third aspect to be executed; or, cause the method described in the fourth aspect and any possibility of the fourth aspect to be executed.
  • a communication system which includes the above-mentioned first site and the above-mentioned second site, the first site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned first aspect and any possibility of the first aspect, or the first site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned second aspect and any possibility of the second aspect, the second site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned third aspect and any possibility of the third aspect, or the second site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned fourth aspect and any possibility of the fourth aspect.
  • FIG. 4 is another schematic diagram of a service transmission method 200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is another schematic diagram of the service transmission method 200 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is another schematic diagram of the service transmission method 200 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of the service transmission method 200 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a service transmission method 800 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is another schematic diagram of a service transmission method 800 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a communication device 1100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram of an example communication device 1200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the STA in the embodiment of the present application can be a wireless communication chip, a wireless sensor or a wireless communication terminal.
  • a mobile phone that supports Wi-Fi communication function
  • a tablet computer that supports Wi-Fi communication function
  • a set-top box that supports Wi-Fi communication function
  • a smart TV that supports Wi-Fi communication function
  • a smart wearable device that supports Wi-Fi communication function
  • a vehicle-mounted communication device that supports Wi-Fi communication function
  • a computer that supports Wi-Fi communication function.
  • STA can support the 802.11ax standard
  • STA can support multiple WLAN standards such as 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b and 802.11a or subsequent versions.
  • the STA or AP includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a windows operating system.
  • the application layer includes applications such as a browser, an address book, a word processing software, and an instant messaging software.
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture 100 of a wireless local area network applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network architecture 100 includes access points AP110 and AP120.
  • the network architecture 100 may also include stations STA111, STA112, STA113 associated with access point AP110 and stations STA121, STA122, STA123 associated with access point AP120.
  • access point AP110, stations STA111, STA112, STA113 constitute basic service set 1 (basic service set, BSS1)
  • access points AP120, STA121, STA122, STA123 constitute BSS2.
  • AP110 and AP120 can cooperate in transmission to provide uplink or downlink transmission services for the same or different users.
  • Figure 1 is only exemplary and should not limit the network architecture of the wireless local area network to which the present application is applicable.
  • the network architecture may also include more APs, and each AP may be associated with more STAs.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited here.
  • the AP in the above network architecture 100 can be considered as an AP-type station, and the STA in the above network architecture 100 can be considered as a non-access point-type station (none access point station, non-AP STA).
  • Low latency is an important research goal for current business transmission.
  • real-time applications have stricter requirements for low latency transmission, and even require ultra-low latency of less than a few milliseconds and ultra-high reliability (UHR).
  • UHR ultra-high reliability
  • the above-mentioned preemptive technology can be divided into preemption at the physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) level and preemption at the transmission opportunity (TXOP) level.
  • PPDU physical layer protocol data unit
  • TXOP transmission opportunity
  • the PPDU level preemption is specifically: when the sending site is transmitting non-low-latency service data packets, if other sites have transmission requirements for ultra-low-latency service data packets, the sending site interrupts the current PPDU transmission and allows other sites to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets; after the transmission of the ultra-low-latency service data packets is completed, the transmission of the non-low-latency service data packets will continue.
  • the TXOP level preemption specifically means that when the sending station is transmitting non-low-latency service data packets within a TXOP, if other stations have transmission requirements for ultra-low-latency service data packets, the sending station can complete the transmission of the current PPDU within the TXOP and allow other stations to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets in the same TXOP.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a service transmission method 200, which can reduce the impact of other stations' preemption on the original transmission of the sending station.
  • the sending site reduces the original transmission channel after detecting the preemptive signal of other sites, and reserves a part of the channel for the preemptive transmission of other sites, which can ensure both the original transmission of the sending site and the preemptive transmission of other sites.
  • the first station (i.e., the sending station) in the following service transmission method 200 may be the AP 110 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the second station i.e., the other station
  • the first station may be the AP 110 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the second station may be the STA 121 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the first station may be the STA 111 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the second station may be the STA 121 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the first station may be the STA 111 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the second station may be the STA 121 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the first station may be the STA 111 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the first site when the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS, before receiving the preemptive signal, the first site may perform the original transmission on the main channel and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong; after the first site receives the preemptive signal, the first site may reserve the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong for the second site to use for preemptive transmission.
  • the first site may perform original transmission on the main channel and secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs and the main channel and secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs; after the first site receives the first information, the first site will at least reserve the main channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs for the second site to use for preemptive transmission.
  • step S210 the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using the first channel.
  • the bandwidth of the first channel may be any bandwidth such as 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 320 MHz, 640 MHz, etc., and this application does not limit this.
  • Step S212 The second site sends first information to the first site, where the first information is used to indicate that the second site requests service transmission. Correspondingly, the first site receives the first information.
  • the first information may be the preemptive signal
  • the preemptive signal may be a short training field (STF)
  • the preemptive signal may be STF+long training field (LTF)
  • the preemptive signal may be STF+LTF+signaling field (SIG).
  • step S214 the first station transmits at least one second PPDU with the third station using a second channel, where the second channel is a part of the first channel.
  • the above-mentioned “the second channel is a part of the above-mentioned first channel” can be understood as “the above-mentioned second channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the bandwidth of the above-mentioned second channel is a part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel are a part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the above-mentioned second channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel”, etc., and the present application does not impose any limitation on this.
  • the bandwidth of the second channel is a partial bandwidth of the bandwidth of the first channel
  • the position of the bandwidth of the second channel is within the position of the bandwidth of the first channel, and also means that the size of the bandwidth of the second channel is smaller than the size of the bandwidth of the first channel.
  • the second channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong.
  • the second channel may be the primary channel, the secondary channel, or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, or the second channel may be the primary channel or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs;
  • the second channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs, the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs, or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, or the second channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs.
  • the at least one second PPDU may be the remaining PPDU of the first station during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station continues to transmit the at least one second PPDU after the transmission channel of the first station changes from the first channel to the second channel.
  • the at least one second PPDU may be the PPDU of the new service transmitted by the first station.
  • the first station interrupts the transmission of the last first PPDU during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station retransmits the interrupted last first PPDU and continues to transmit the remaining PPDU or the PPDU of the new service after the transmission channel of the first station changes from the first channel to the second channel.
  • Step S216 The second station transmits at least one third PPDU using the third channel, where the third channel is a part of the first channel.
  • the above-mentioned “the third channel is part of the first channel” can be understood as “the above-mentioned third channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the bandwidth of the above-mentioned third channel is part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel are part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the above-mentioned third channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel”, etc., and the present application does not limit this.
  • the bandwidth of the third channel is a partial bandwidth of the bandwidth of the first channel” means that the bandwidth of the third channel is within the bandwidth of the first channel and that the bandwidth of the third channel is smaller than the bandwidth of the first channel. size.
  • the transmission delay of the at least one third PPDU is lower than the transmission delay of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU, or the requirement of the at least one third PPDU on the delay performance is higher than the requirement of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU on the delay performance.
  • the three PPDUs may be RATs, and the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU may be non-low-latency services.
  • the at least one third PPDU is other services that need to be transmitted in a timely manner, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the first site when the service transmission of the first site is preempted, the first site can maintain the transmission of the original service and reserve a part of the channel for preemptive transmission by reducing the transmission channel of the original service, thereby reducing the impact on the original transmission of the first site.
  • the method 200 for transmitting the above-mentioned service provided in the present application is described in detail by taking a first scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and a second scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS as examples.
  • STA 121 needs to transmit an ultra-low-latency service data packet to AP 120 in BSS2.
  • STA 121 wants to occupy some channels for transmitting non-low-latency service data packets between AP 110 and a certain STA in BSS1, so STA 121 can send a preemptive signal to AP 110 on the main channel of BSS2; or, the first station can be STA 111 in BSS1 of the above network architecture 100 and the second station can be STA 121 in BSS2 of the above network architecture 100.
  • STA 121 needs to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets to AP 120 in BSS2, and STA 121 wants to occupy some channels for transmitting non-low-latency service data packets between STA 111 and a certain STA in BSS1, so STA 121 can send a preemptive signal to STA 111 on the main channel of BSS2, etc.
  • This application is not limited.
  • the following description specifically takes the first site in the first scenario as AP 110 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second site as AP 120 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100 as an example.
  • the following Figures 3 to 6 correspond to the description based on the first scenario as an example.
  • the third site may be STA 113 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the fourth site may be STA 121 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the third site may also be other STAs in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100
  • the fourth site may also be other STAs in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the present application does not limit this.
  • AP 110 may transmit at least one first PPDU to STA 113 on the primary channel (primary channel), the secondary channel (secondary channel) of BSS1 and the primary channel and the secondary channel of BSS2, and there is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent PPDUs in the at least one PPDU.
  • the time interval #1 may be the short interframe space (SIFS) shown in FIG3 , and each SIFS may be 10 microseconds ( ⁇ s).
  • FIG3 only shows the primary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel of BSS2, but the transmission of at least one first PPDU may also be transmitted on the secondary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS2.
  • the primary channel and the secondary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel and the secondary channel of BSS2 here may be examples of the above-mentioned first channel.
  • time interval #1 can also be other forms of inter-frame intervals such as point coordination function interframe space (PIFS), which is not limited in this application.
  • PIFS point coordination function interframe space
  • AP 110 When AP 120 has a preemptive service (e.g., the at least one third PPDU) to transmit, in order to enable AP 110 to detect the first information, AP 110 allows AP 120 to send the first information in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information in the first time interval and receives the first information.
  • the first time interval belongs to the time interval #1.
  • the first time interval is the time interval between the at least one first PPDU and the at least one second PPDU; when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU.
  • the AP 110 After receiving the first information in the first time interval, transmits the at least one second PPDU using a portion of the first channel (i.e., the second channel).
  • AP 110 instructs AP 120 to send the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval and receives the first information.
  • the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, or the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state;
  • the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, or the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state.
  • the time corresponding to "1" in FIG. 3 may be the second time
  • the time corresponding to "2" in FIG. 3 may be the third time. Therefore, AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval, which can increase the probability that AP 110 detects the first information and reduce the resource overhead of AP 120.
  • the at least one first PPDU may further include first indication information, and the first indication information may indicate at least one of the following information:
  • the period of sending or receiving the first information can be considered as a preemption period (preemption period, PP)
  • the time interval of sending or receiving the first information can be considered as a preemption opportunity (preemption opportunity, PROP)
  • the PP or PROP can be considered to be the same as the transmission period of the at least one first PPDU, as shown in Figure 3.
  • the first indication information can include the first first PPDU sent in the at least one PPDU, which is not limited in this application.
  • the time interval #1 can be considered as the time interval for sending or receiving the first information here.
  • part or all of the at least one first PPDU may further include identification (ID) information of a sending site (i.e., the first site), ID information of a receiving site (i.e., the third site), resource allocation information, modulation and coding scheme (MCS) information, number of spatial and time streams (NSTS) information, etc.
  • ID identification
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • NSTS number of spatial and time streams
  • AP 110 When AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120, AP 110 reduces the channel for service transmission from the first channel to the second channel, and uses the second channel to transmit the above-mentioned at least one second PPDU with STA 113.
  • the second channel can be determined in the following two ways:
  • Method 1 (the main channels corresponding to AP 110 and AP 120 are different): AP 110 receives the first information on the fourth channel, and AP 110 determines that part or all of the channels in the first channel except the fourth channel are the second channel.
  • AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 on its primary channel, and the second channel determined by AP 110 includes part or all of the first channel except the primary channel of AP 120.
  • AP 120 sends the first information on the primary channel of BSS2, and AP 110 determines that the primary channel of BSS1 is the second channel.
  • AP 110 transmits at least one first PPDU with STA 113 on channel 1, channel 2, channel 3, and channel 4, wherein channel 1 corresponds to the main channel of BSS1, channel 3 corresponds to the main channel of BSS2, and channel 4 corresponds to the main channel of BSS3; when AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120 on the main channel of BSS2 and receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 130 on the main channel of BSS3, AP 110 determines that the channel corresponding to channel 1 and channel 2 is the second channel.
  • the position and/or size of the fourth channel for sending the first information by AP 120 may be limited within a predetermined range to avoid the situation where the fourth channel for sending the first information by AP 120 is occupied too much and causes the original transmission to be interrupted.
  • the fourth channel is in the high frequency band of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel, etc.
  • the “fourth channel” in “AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 on the fourth channel to indicate that AP 120 wants to occupy the fourth channel for sending the first information for preemptive transmission” is the same as “the first information is used to indicate that AP 120 requests to use the third channel for transmission”.
  • the "third channel” in the "preemptive transmission” may be the same, partially the same, or completely different, and this application does not limit this.
  • Mode 2 (AP 110 and AP 120 have the same primary channel): In Mode 1, AP 110 and AP 120 have different primary channels. Mode 2 occurs when AP 110 and AP 120 have the same primary channel. In this case, the primary channel of BSS1 is the same as the primary channel of BSS2.
  • AP 110 can transmit at least one first PPDU with STA 113 on channel 1 and channel 2, wherein channel 1 corresponds to the primary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel of BSS2, and channel 2 corresponds to the secondary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS2; when AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120 on channel 1, the AP 110 sends the second information, and the second information is used to indicate the switching of the primary channel of AP 110 and the primary channel of AP 110 after the switching, and the above-mentioned second channel includes the primary channel of AP 110 after the switching.
  • AP 110 in FIG5 indicates through the second information that its primary channel is switched to channel 2, and transmits at least one second PPDU on channel 2 or a channel including channel 2.
  • the second information can be carried in any wireless frame for transmission, or carried in the first second PPDU transmitted in the at least one second PPDU, as shown in FIG6 .
  • Each second PPDU in the at least one second PPDU includes a signaling portion and a data portion of a header, and the second information can be carried in the signaling portion of the first second PPDU header.
  • the signaling portion of the first second PPDU header is transmitted on both channel 1 and channel 2, and the data portion of the first second PPDU transmitted and subsequent second PPDUs are transmitted on channel 2.
  • the third channel used for the AP 120 and the STA 121 to transmit at least one third PPDU can be determined in the following four ways:
  • Method 1 After the AP 110 determines the second channel, it will use the second channel to transmit at least one second PPDU. After the AP 110 starts to transmit at least one second PPDU, the AP 120 can monitor that the idle channel on the first channel is the third channel, and use the third channel to transmit at least one third PPDU, such as the scenarios shown in Figures 3, 5, and 6. For the scenario of more BSSs shown in Figure 4, after the AP 110 determines the second channel and uses the second channel to start transmitting at least one second PPDU, the AP 120 and the AP 130 can monitor that the idle channel on the first channel is an available channel. At this time, the AP 120 and the AP 130 need to compete for the channel.
  • the AP 120 determines that the main channel of BSS2 is the third channel. After the AP 120 starts to transmit at least one third PPDU using the third channel, the AP 130 can monitor that the idle channel on the first channel is channel 4, and the AP 130 uses channel 4 to transmit the preemptive service.
  • the AP 120 may perform channel contention based on enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA), where a first EDCA parameter set for the AP 120 to perform channel contention based on EDCA may be different from a second EDCA parameter set used when the AP 120 performs other service transmission.
  • EDCA enhanced distributed channel access
  • the other services here may be considered as services when the AP 120 performs non-preemptive transmission.
  • the third indication information includes one bit, the value of which is 1, indicating that AP 110 allows AP 120 to transmit at least one third PPDU on a portion of the first channel.
  • the third indication information also includes N bits, which indicate the position and size of the third channel.
  • the N bits may form a bitmap, each of which represents a 20 MHZ bandwidth, and the bitmap [0110] indicates that the channel corresponding to the middle 40 MHZ bandwidth of the 80 MHZ bandwidth is the third channel.
  • the N bits may form a bitmap [0101], indicating that the channel corresponding to the second 20 MHZ bandwidth of the 80 MHZ bandwidth and the channel corresponding to the fourth 20 MHZ bandwidth are the third channel.
  • the third channel may be determined according to the working channel of the AP 110 (ie, the first channel). Specifically, how the third channel is determined by the working channel of the AP 110 may be predefined.
  • the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 320MHZ
  • the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 160MHZ; or, the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 160MHZ, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 80MHZ; the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 80MHZ, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 40MHZ; the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 40MHZ, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 20MHZ.
  • the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 320MHZ
  • the bandwidth of the third channel may be 160MHZ in the high frequency band of the working channel of AP 110.
  • the bandwidth of the third channel may be 160MHZ in the low frequency band of the working channel of AP 110.
  • the bandwidth of the third channel does not exceed 160MHZ and the position of the third bandwidth is not limited.
  • a preemptive protocol is established between AP 110 and AP 120.
  • AP 110 sends fourth information to AP 120, where the fourth information is used to indicate the configuration information of the third channel.
  • the configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel.
  • AP 120 sends third information to AP 110, where the third information is used to request the configuration information of the third channel.
  • the negotiation process of method 4 above can be completed before AP 120 performs preemptive transmission.
  • STA 112 in BSS1 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 110 in BSS1, and STA 112 wants to occupy part of the channel for STA 111 and AP 110 in BSS1 to transmit non-low latency service data packets, so STA 112 can send a preemptive signal to STA 111.
  • STA 111 and AP 110 transmit at least one first PPDU on the main channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS1 (or non-main channel), and the main channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS1 may be an example of the above-mentioned first channel; before the occurrence of occupation, STA 111 and AP 110 transmit at least one second PPDU on the main channel of BSS1, and the main channel of BSS1 may be an example of the above-mentioned second channel; STA 112 and AP 110 transmit at least one third PPDU on the secondary channel of BSS1 (or non-main channel), and the secondary channel of BSS1 may be an example of the above-mentioned third channel.
  • step S310 the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using the first channel.
  • the service transmission method 300 when the first site has an ultra-low latency service to be transmitted, there is no need to wait for the current service transmission to be completed before transmission can be performed.
  • the transmission of the ultra-low latency service data packet can be executed immediately, thereby improving the service experience.
  • step S810 the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using a first channel based on a first parameter.
  • the bandwidth of the first channel may be any bandwidth such as 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 320 MHz, 640 MHz, etc., and this application does not limit this.
  • the first information is further used to indicate that the second station requests to use the first channel.
  • the second station may request to use the first channel to transmit at least one third PPDU with the fourth station.
  • the first parameter includes the power of the first site transmitting the at least one first PPDU or the MCS of the first site transmitting the at least one first PPDU
  • the second parameter includes the power of the first site transmitting the at least one second PPDU or the MCS of the first site transmitting the at least one second PPDU.
  • the power represented by the second parameter is lower than the power represented by the first parameter, or the MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter.
  • Modulation can define how many bits a single resource element (RE) carries.
  • the current 5G NR supports modulation methods such as QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM, and 256-QAM.
  • QPSK modulation each RE can carry 2 bits; with 16-QAM modulation, each RE can carry 4 bits; with 64-QAM modulation, each RE can carry 6 bits; with 256-QAM modulation, each RE can carry 8 bits, etc.
  • the 16, 64, 256, etc. shown here are the modulation orders.
  • the third parameter can be determined in the following three ways:
  • Mode 1 Some or all of the at least one first PPDU sent by the first station include fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the third parameter.
  • the fourth indication information is carried in other wireless frames (such as beacon frames, probe response frames, etc.) sent by the first station.
  • the second station can monitor at least one first PPDU, other wireless frames, etc. sent by the first station.
  • Method 2 The third parameter may be predefined.
  • Method three the third parameter may be negotiated in advance between the first site and the second site through signaling interaction.
  • a preemptive protocol is established between the first station and the second station.
  • the first station sends fifth information to the second station, where the fifth information is used to indicate the third parameter.
  • the second site sends sixth information to the first site, where the sixth information is used to request a third parameter.
  • the negotiation process of the above-mentioned method 3 can be completed before the second station performs preemptive transmission.
  • Step S816 The second station transmits at least one third PPDU using the first channel based on the third parameter.
  • the second site transmits at least one third PPDU using the first channel based on the first power, or the second site transmits at least one third PPDU based on the first MCS.
  • the above-mentioned step S816 may not be performed, in which case the above-mentioned second site transmits at least one third PPDU with a power lower than the maximum transmission power of the second site, or the above-mentioned second site transmits at least one third PPDU with an MCS lower than the highest MCS of the second site.
  • the maximum transmit power of the second site and the highest MCS of the second site may be determined in the following three ways:
  • Mode 1 Some or all of the at least one first PPDU sent by the first station include fifth indication information, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate the maximum transmission power of the second station or the highest MCS of the second station.
  • the fifth indication information is carried in other radio frames (such as beacon frames, detection response frames, etc.) sent by the first station.
  • the second station can monitor at least one first PPDU, other radio frames, etc. sent by the first station.
  • Method 2 The maximum transmission power of the second site or the highest MCS of the second site may be predefined.
  • the maximum transmission power of the second site or the highest MCS of the second site may be predefined in advance.
  • Method three the maximum transmission power of the second site or the highest MCS of the second site may be negotiated in advance between the first site and the second site through signaling interaction.
  • a preemptive protocol is established between the first station and the second station.
  • the first station sends seventh information to the second station, where the seventh information is used to indicate the maximum transmit power of the second station or the highest MCS of the second station.
  • the second site sends eighth information to the first site, where the eighth information is used to request a maximum transmission power of the second site or a highest MCS of the second site.
  • the negotiation process of the above-mentioned method 3 can be completed before the second station performs preemptive transmission.
  • the transmission delay of the at least one third PPDU is lower than the transmission delay of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU.
  • the at least one third PPDU may be a RAT
  • the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU may be a non-low-latency service
  • the at least one third PPDU may be other services that need to be transmitted in a timely manner, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first site when the service transmission of the first site is preempted, the first site can maintain the transmission of the original service and reduce the impact on the preempted service transmission by reducing the transmission parameters of the original service or reducing the transmission parameters of the preempted service. It can reduce the impact on the original transmission of the first site and reduce the impact on the preempted service.
  • the method 800 for transmitting the above-mentioned service provided in the present application is described in detail by taking a first scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and a second scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS as examples.
  • the first station may be AP 110 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the second station may be AP 120 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100.
  • AP 120 needs to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets to a certain STA in BSS2, and AP 120 wants to occupy the channel for AP 110 and a certain STA in BSS1 to transmit non-low-latency service data packets.
  • the first station may be AP 110 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100
  • the second station may be STA 121 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100.
  • STA 121 1 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 120 in BSS2, and STA 121 wants to occupy the channel for non-low latency service data packets transmitted between AP 110 and a certain STA in BSS1; or, the first station can be STA 111 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100 and the second station can be STA 121 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100.
  • STA 121 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 120 in BSS2, and STA 121 wants to occupy the channel for non-low latency service data packets transmitted between STA 111 and a certain STA in BSS1, etc.
  • This application is not limited.
  • the following specifically describes the first scenario in which the first station is AP 110 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100 and the second station is AP 120 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100.
  • Figure 10 below corresponds to the description of the first scenario of the service transmission method 800 as an example.
  • the third station may be STA 113 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the fourth station may be STA 121 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100. It should be noted that the third station may also be other STAs in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the fourth station may also be other STAs in BSS2 of the network architecture 100, which is not limited in the present application.
  • AP 110 may transmit at least one first PPDU with STA 113 on the primary channel of BSS1, the secondary channel of BSS1, the primary channel of BSS2, and the secondary channel of BSS2, and there is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent PPDUs in the at least one PPDU.
  • the time interval #1 may be the SIFS shown in FIG10, and each SIFS may be 10 microseconds ( ⁇ s).
  • the primary channel of BSS1, the secondary channel of BSS1, the primary channel of BSS2, and the secondary channel of BSS2 shown in FIG10 may be an example of the above-mentioned first channel. It should be noted that FIG10 only shows the primary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel of BSS2, but the transmission of at least one first PPDU may also be transmitted on the secondary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS2.
  • time interval #1 may also be other forms of inter-frame intervals such as PIFS, which is not limited in the present application.
  • PIFS inter-frame intervals
  • AP 110 When AP 120 has a preemptive service (e.g., the at least one third PPDU) to transmit, in order to enable AP 110 to detect the first information, AP 110 allows AP 120 to send the first information in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information in the first time interval and receives the first information.
  • a preemptive service e.g., the at least one third PPDU
  • the first time interval is the time interval between the at least one first PPDU and the at least one second PPDU; when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the number of the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU.
  • the AP 110 After receiving the first information at the first time interval, the AP 110 transmits the at least one second PPDU using the first channel based on the second parameter.
  • AP 110 instructs AP 120 to send the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time window and receives the first information.
  • the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, or the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state;
  • the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, or the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state.
  • the time corresponding to "1" in FIG. 10 may be the second time
  • the time corresponding to "2" in FIG. 9 may be the third time. Therefore, AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 at a time interval other than the second time and/or the third time in the first time interval, which can increase the probability that AP 110 detects the first information and reduce the resource overhead of AP 120.
  • the at least one first PPDU may further include first indication information, and the first indication information may indicate at least one of the following information:
  • AP 110 When AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120, AP 110 does not change the channel for service transmission, but reduces the parameters for service transmission.
  • the first station and the second station of the first scenario of the above-mentioned service transmission method 800 belong to different BSSs respectively, and the first station and the second station of the following second scenario belong to the same BSS.
  • the following second scenario is described by taking STA 111 in BSS1 as the first station and STA 112 in BSS1 as the second station.
  • the above-mentioned third station and the above-mentioned fourth station corresponding to the second scenario are both the above-mentioned AP 110 in BSS1.
  • STA 112 in BSS1 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 110 in BSS1, and STA 112 wants to occupy the channel for STA 111 and AP 110 in BSS1 to transmit non-low latency service data packets, so STA 112 can send a preemptive signal to STA 111.
  • STA 111 and AP 110 before the occurrence of occupation, transmit at least one first PPDU on the primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel (or non-primary channel) of BSS1; before the occurrence of occupation, STA 111 and AP 110 transmit at least one second PPDU on the primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel (or non-primary channel) of BSS1. And before the occurrence of occupation, STA 112 and AP 110 also transmit at least one third PPDU on the primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel (or non-primary channel) of BSS1.
  • the primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS1 here are examples of the first channel mentioned above.
  • the rest of the second scenario can refer to the first scenario mentioned above and will not be repeated here.
  • the method 800 for transmitting the service can reduce the transmission parameters of the original service or reduce the transmission parameters of the preemptive service, thereby maintaining the original transmission without interruption and reducing the impact on the preemptive service.
  • AP 110 transmits at least one second PPDU on the first channel before the preemption occurs, so that AP 120 considers that the first channel is busy during channel contention, and AP 120 may not be able to transmit at least one third PPDU on the first channel.
  • the present application proposes a solution: when performing channel contention, the AP 120 uses a higher clear channel assessment (CCA) threshold value to determine whether the first channel is idle. For example, the CCA threshold value for channel contention is set higher than the first threshold value or a higher CCA threshold value is set.
  • CCA clear channel assessment
  • Mode 2 the CCA threshold value or the first threshold value may be predefined.
  • the CCA threshold value or the first threshold value mentioned above may be predefined in advance.
  • Method three The above-mentioned CCA threshold value or the above-mentioned first threshold value can be negotiated in advance between AP 110 and AP 120.
  • the success rate of channel contention when the preemptive station uses the same channel as the sending station to perform preemptive service transmission can be improved.
  • the main difference between the service transmission method 900 and the above-mentioned service transmission method 800 is that: there is no need to perform the above-mentioned step S812 and the above-mentioned at least one first PPDU, the above-mentioned at least one second PPDU and the above-mentioned at least one third PPDU are all transmitted by the sending site.
  • step S910 the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using a first channel based on a first parameter.
  • Step S912 when the first site detects that there is a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements in the newly arrived cached data packets, the first site uses the above-mentioned first channel to transmit at least one second PPDU with the third site based on the second parameters, and uses the above-mentioned first channel to transmit at least one third PPDU based on the third parameters.
  • the at least one third PPDU may be a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements transmitted by the first station and the fourth station
  • the fourth station in the service transmission method 900 may be the third station in the service transmission method 900, or the fourth station may be This application does not limit other sites that can interact with the first site for data.
  • the at least one second PPDU may be the remaining PPDU of the first station during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station continues to transmit the at least one second PPDU using the first channel after receiving the first information.
  • the at least one second PPDU may be the PPDU of a new service transmitted by the first station using the first channel after receiving the first information.
  • the first station interrupts the transmission of the last first PPDU during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station retransmits the interrupted last first PPDU and continues to transmit the remaining PPDU or the PPDU of the new service using the first channel after receiving the first information.
  • the communication device 1100 includes a processor 1110 and a communication interface 1120, and the processor 1110 and the communication interface 1120 may be interconnected via a bus 1130.
  • the communication device 1100 may be a first site or a second site.
  • the communication device 1100 may further include a memory 1140.
  • the memory 1140 includes, but is not limited to, a random access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or a portable read-only memory (CD-ROM), and the memory 1140 is used to store relevant instructions and data.
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM portable read-only memory
  • the processor 1110 may be one or more central processing units (CPUs). In the case where the processor 1110 is a CPU, the CPU may be a single-core CPU or a multi-core CPU.
  • the communication device 1100 is used to perform the following operations: sending first information to the first site, etc.
  • the transceiver unit 1210 receives first information from a second station, and the processing unit 1220 is configured to transmit the at least one second PPDU using the second channel.
  • the communication device 1300 includes: an input/output interface 1320 and a processor 1310.
  • the input/output interface 1320 may be an input/output circuit.
  • the processor 1310 may be a signal processor, a chip, or other integrated circuit that can implement the method of the present application.
  • the input/output interface 1320 is used for inputting or outputting signals or data.
  • processor and memory are integrated together.
  • the processor 1310 may be a logic circuit, and the processor 1310 inputs/outputs messages or signals through the input/output interface 1320.
  • the logic circuit may be a signal processor, a chip, or other integrated circuit that can implement the method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the present application also provides a chip, including: an input interface, an output interface, and a processor, wherein the input interface, the output interface, and the processor are connected via an internal connection path, and the processor is used to execute the code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor is used to execute the method in each of the above examples.
  • the chip also includes a memory, and the memory is used to store computer programs or codes.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the present application are a service transmission method and apparatus. The technical solution provided in the present application can be applied to a wireless local area network system that supports IEEE 802.11be next-generation Wi-Fi protocols (such as Wi-Fi 8, UHR and 11bn), or Wi-Fi AI, or millimeter waves (mmWave), or ultra-wideband (UWB), or sensing. The service transmission method comprises: a sending station using a first channel to transmit at least one first PPDU with a receiving station; the sending station receiving a preemption signal from a preemption station during the process of transmitting the at least one first PPDU, wherein the preemption signal indicates that the preemption station makes a request to perform service transmission; and the sending station using part of the first channel to continue to perform service transmission, and reserving part of the channel for the preemption station to perform preemption transmission. By means of the method of the present application, the influence on a service that is currently being transmitted by a sending station can be reduced.

Description

业务传输方法和装置Business transmission method and device

本申请要求于2023年10月10日提交俄罗斯国家知识产权局、申请号为2023125825、申请名称为“业务传输方法和装置”的俄罗斯专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to Russian patent application No. 2023125825 filed with the Russian State Intellectual Property Office on October 10, 2023, entitled “Method and Device for Business Transmission”, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请涉及通信技术领域,更具体地,本申请涉及一种业务传输方法和装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and more specifically, to a service transmission method and device.

背景技术Background Art

低时延是当前业务传输的一个重要研究目标,尤其地,实时业务(real time application,RAT)对于低时延传输的要求更加严格,甚至出现了小于几毫秒的超低时延以及超高可靠性(ultra high reliability,UHR)的要求。为了确保RAT的低时延传输,当前引入了占先(preemption)技术。Low latency is an important research goal for current business transmission. In particular, real-time applications (RAT) have stricter requirements for low latency transmission, and even require ultra-low latency of less than a few milliseconds and ultra-high reliability (UHR). In order to ensure low latency transmission of RAT, preemption technology is currently introduced.

占先技术具体是:发送站点在进行非低时延的业务数据包的传输时,其它站点有超低时延要求的业务数据包需要传输,那么发送站点中断当前PPDU的传输并允许其它站点占用信道进行超低时延要求的业务数据包的传输,或者,发送站点传输完毕当前的PPDU后中断非低时延业务数据包的传输并允许其它站点占用信道进行超低时延要求的业务数据包的传输。因此,其它站点对该发送站点进行占先会导致该发送站点的传输中断,对原有的传输造成一定的影响。The preemptive technology is specifically: when the sending station is transmitting non-low-latency service data packets, other stations have service data packets with ultra-low latency requirements that need to be transmitted, then the sending station interrupts the transmission of the current PPDU and allows other stations to occupy the channel to transmit service data packets with ultra-low latency requirements, or, after the sending station completes the transmission of the current PPDU, it interrupts the transmission of non-low-latency service data packets and allows other stations to occupy the channel to transmit service data packets with ultra-low latency requirements. Therefore, other stations preempting the sending station will cause the transmission of the sending station to be interrupted, which will have a certain impact on the original transmission.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请提供一种业务传输方法和装置,可以降低对发送站点的原有传输的影响。The present application provides a service transmission method and device, which can reduce the impact on the original transmission of the sending site.

第一方面,提供了一种业务传输方法,该方法可以由第一站点执行,或者,也可以由第一站点中的模块(例如芯片或电路)执行,或者,还可以由能实现全部或部分第一站点功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件执行,本申请对此不作限定。In the first aspect, a service transmission method is provided, which can be executed by a first site, or by a module (such as a chip or circuit) in the first site, or by a logical node, logical module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first site, and the present application does not limit this.

该方法包括:第一站点使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU;第一站点接收第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输;第一站点使用第二信道与上述第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,该第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分。The method includes: the first station uses a first channel to transmit at least one first PPDU with a third station; the first station receives first information, and the first information is used to indicate that the second station requests service transmission; the first station uses a second channel to transmit at least one second PPDU with the third station, and the second channel is part of the first channel.

具体地,上述“第二信道是第一信道的一部分”可以理解为上述第二信道是上述第一信道的部分信道,或者,上述第二信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的一部分,或者,上述第二信道对应的频域资源是上述第一信道对应的频域资源的一部分,或者,上述第二信道对应的频域范围包含于上述第一信道对应的频域范围,或者,上述第二信道是上述第一信道的子信道等。Specifically, the above-mentioned “the second channel is a part of the first channel” can be understood as the above-mentioned second channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the bandwidth of the above-mentioned second channel is a part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel are a part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the above-mentioned second channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel, etc.

具体地,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是与至少一个第一PPDU属于相同业务的PPDU,上述至少一个第二PPDU也可以是新业务的PPDU,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the at least one second PPDU may be a PPDU belonging to the same service as the at least one first PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU may also be a PPDU of a new service, which is not limited in the present application.

具体地,上述第一信息可以是占先信号。Specifically, the above-mentioned first information may be a preemptive signal.

当发送站点的业务传输被占先时,通过减少原业务的传输信道的方式保持原业务的继续传输,可以降低对原有传输的影响。When the service transmission of the sending station is preempted, the impact on the original transmission can be reduced by reducing the transmission channel of the original service to maintain the continued transmission of the original service.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information.

其中,上述时间间隔也可以理解为时间窗。The above time interval can also be understood as a time window.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, there is a first time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, and the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at the first time interval.

上述第一时间间隔可以为占先机会(preemption opportunity,PROP)。The above-mentioned first time interval can be a preemption opportunity (PROP).

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占 先信号。The sending station (i.e., the first station) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive station (i.e., the second station) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending station, so that the sending station can detect the preemptive signal. Signal first.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与上述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, there is a first time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at the first time interval.

上述至少一个第一PPDU中任意的两个相邻第一PPDU之间存在时间间隔#1,因此至少一个第一PPDU之间存在多个时间间隔#1,该多个时间间隔#1为PROP,上述第一时间间隔可以为其中的一个PROP。There is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent first PPDUs in the at least one first PPDU mentioned above, so there are multiple time intervals #1 between at least one first PPDU, and the multiple time intervals #1 are PROPs, and the first time interval mentioned above can be one of the PROPs.

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期可以认为是占先周期(preemption period,PP),该PP也可以理解为PROP的周期。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU mentioned above can be considered as a preemption period (PP), and the PP can also be understood as the period of PROP.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占先信号。The sending site (i.e., the first site mentioned above) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,上述第一时间间隔还包括第二时间和第三时间,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从接收状态转换为发送状态,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the first time interval also includes a second time and a third time, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, and the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.

可选地,上述至少一个第一PPDU还可以包括第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔。Optionally, the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送站点的发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔发送占先信号,不仅可以增加发送站点检测到占先信号的成功率,还可以降低占先站点的资源开销。The sending site (i.e., the first site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state to receive the preemptive signal, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state of the sending site to send the preemptive signal. This can not only increase the success rate of the sending site detecting the preemptive signal, but also reduce the resource overhead of the preemptive site.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第四信道上接收到上述第一信息,该第四信道的上述第一信道的一部分;上述方法还包括:第一站点确定上述第一信道中除上述第四信道之外的信道为上述第二信道。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receiving the first information on a fourth channel, which is a part of the first channel; the method also includes: the first site determining that the channel in the first channel other than the fourth channel is the second channel.

具体地,上述第一站点可以确定上述第一信道中除上述第四信道之外的部分或全部信道为上述第二信道。Specifically, the first site may determine that part or all of the first channels except the fourth channel are the second channels.

具体地,上述第一站点在第四信道上接收到上述第一信息表明第二站点想要占用第四信道进行占先传输,此处的第四信道与上述第二站点请求使用的第三信道可以相同或部分相同或完全不同。Specifically, the first station receiving the first information on the fourth channel indicates that the second station wants to occupy the fourth channel for preemptive transmission. The fourth channel here may be the same as, partially the same as, or completely different from the third channel requested by the second station.

发送站点(即第一站点)可以通过接收占先信号的信道获知占先站点(即第二站点)想要进行占先传输的信道,据此为占先传输预留信道并重新确定原先传输的信道,既可以保证占先传输的进行还可以保证原先传输不中断。The sending station (i.e., the first station) can learn the channel on which the preemptive station (i.e., the second station) wants to preempt transmission by receiving the channel of the preemptive signal, and reserve a channel for the preemptive transmission and re-determine the channel of the original transmission, thereby ensuring that the preemptive transmission is carried out and the original transmission is not interrupted.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的高频段部分,或者,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的低频段部分,或者,上述第四信道的带宽小于或等于上述第一信道的带宽的一半。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the fourth channel is in the high frequency band of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel.

通过对占先站点(即第二站点)发送上述第四信道进行一定的限定,避免占先站点发送上述第一信息的第四信道占用过多导致原有的传输中断的情况发生。By imposing certain restrictions on the fourth channel sent by the first station (ie, the second station), it is avoided that the fourth channel used by the first station to send the first information is occupied too much, resulting in the interruption of the original transmission.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,当上述第一站点的主信道与上述第二站点的主信道相同时,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在该主信道上接收到第一信息;上述方法还包括:第一站点发送第二信息,该第二信息用于指示切换第一站点的主信道,第二信道包括切换之后的第一站点的主信道。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, when the main channel of the first site is the same as the main channel of the second site, the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information on the main channel; the method also includes: the first site sends second information, the second information is used to indicate switching the main channel of the first site, and the second channel includes the main channel of the first site after switching.

更进一步地,上述第二信息还用于指示切换之后的上述第一站点的主信道。Furthermore, the second information is also used to indicate the primary channel of the first site after the switch.

在发送站点(即第一站点)与占先站点(即第二站点)的主信道相同的情况下,发送站点收到占先信号后会切换其主信道,发送站点的原先传输也切换到发送站点切换之后的主信道上进行,保证发送站点的原先传输不中断。When the main channels of the sending site (i.e., the first site) and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site) are the same, the sending site will switch its main channel after receiving the preemptive signal, and the original transmission of the sending site will also be switched to the main channel after the sending site switches, ensuring that the original transmission of the sending site is not interrupted.

具体地,上述第二信息可以携带在发送站点的任意无线帧中进行发送,本申请对此不作限定。示例性地,该第二信息可以携带在上述至少一个第二PPDU中进行发送,更具体地,该第二信息可以携带在 上述至少一个第二PPDU中第一个发送的第二PPDU中进行发送。Specifically, the second information may be carried in any wireless frame of the sending station for transmission, and this application does not limit this. Exemplarily, the second information may be carried in at least one second PPDU for transmission, and more specifically, the second information may be carried in The at least one second PPDU is sent in the first second PPDU.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,上述至少一个第二PPDU还可以包括第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上述第二信道。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the at least one second PPDU may further include second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel.

示例性地,上述第二指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第二PPDU中第一个发送的第二PPDU中进行发送。Exemplarily, the second indication information may be carried in the first second PPDU sent among the at least one second PPDU.

发送站点(即第一站点)在确定第二信道后,需要将第二信道通知接收站点(即第三站点),使得接收站点获知如何接收数据。After determining the second channel, the sending station (ie, the first station) needs to notify the receiving station (ie, the third station) of the second channel so that the receiving station knows how to receive data.

结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,上述第一信息还用于指示第二站点请求使用第三信道,该第三信道是上述第一信道的一部分。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first information is further used to indicate that the second station requests to use a third channel, where the third channel is a part of the first channel.

具体地,上述“第三信道是第一信道的一部分”可以理解为上述第三信道是上述第一信道的部分信道,或者,上述第三信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的一部分,或者,上述第三信道对应的频域资源是上述第一信道对应的频域资源的一部分,或者,上述第三信道对应的频域范围包含于上述第一信道对应的频域范围,或者,上述第三信道是上述第一信道的子信道等。Specifically, the above-mentioned “the third channel is part of the first channel” can be understood as the above-mentioned third channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the bandwidth of the above-mentioned third channel is part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel are part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the above-mentioned third channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel, etc.

具体地,上述第二站点请求使用的第三信道可以通过如下三种方式确定:Specifically, the third channel requested to be used by the second station can be determined in the following three ways:

方式一:上述第三信道是根据上述第一信道预定义的。Mode 1: The third channel is predefined based on the first channel.

方式二:上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示第三信道,该第三信道用于上述第二站点传输至少一个第三PPDU。Mode 2: The at least one first PPDU includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a third channel, and the third channel is used for the second site to transmit at least one third PPDU.

示例性地,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU的部分或全部PPDU中,例如,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU中第一个发送的第一PPDU中。Exemplarily, the third indication information may be carried in part or all of the at least one first PPDU. For example, the third indication information may be carried in the first PPDU sent among the at least one first PPDU.

方式三:上述第一站点与上述第二站点通过协商确定上述第三信道,具体步骤如下:Method 3: The first station and the second station determine the third channel through negotiation, and the specific steps are as follows:

上述第一站点向上述第二站点发送第四信息,该第四信息用于指示第三信道的配置信息。The first station sends fourth information to the second station, where the fourth information is used to indicate configuration information of the third channel.

具体地,上述第三信道的配置信息包括第三信道的带宽位置和带宽大小等信息。Specifically, the configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel.

可选地,上述第一站点接收来自第二站点的第三信息,该第三信息用于请求上述第三信道的配置信息。Optionally, the first site receives third information from the second site, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel.

上述方式三的协商过程在第二站点需要传输上述至少一个第三PPDU之前完成即可,具体的协商时间本申请对此不作限定。The negotiation process of the above-mentioned method three only needs to be completed before the second site needs to transmit the above-mentioned at least one third PPDU, and the specific negotiation time is not limited in this application.

通过上述三种方式可以使得第二站点获知第三信道,保证占先传输的正常进行。The above three methods can enable the second station to learn the third channel, thereby ensuring normal preemptive transmission.

第二方面,提供了一种业务传输方法,该方法可以由第一站点执行,或者,也可以由第一站点中的模块(例如芯片或电路)执行,或者,还可以由能实现全部或部分第一站点功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件执行,本申请对此不作限定。On the second aspect, a service transmission method is provided, which can be executed by the first site, or by a module (such as a chip or circuit) in the first site, or by a logical node, logical module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first site, and the present application does not limit this.

该方法包括:第一站点基于第一参数使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU,该第一参数包括传输至少一个第一PPDU的功率或传输至少一个第一PPDU的调制编码方案(modulation and codingscheme,MCS);第一站点接收第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输;第一站点基于第二参数使用第一信道与上述第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,该第一参数包括传输至少一个第二PPDU的功率或传输至少一个第二PPDU的MCS。The method includes: the first station uses a first channel to transmit at least one first PPDU to a third station based on a first parameter, and the first parameter includes a power for transmitting the at least one first PPDU or a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for transmitting the at least one first PPDU; the first station receives first information, and the first information is used to indicate that the second station requests to transmit a service; the first station uses the first channel to transmit at least one second PPDU to the third station based on a second parameter, and the first parameter includes a power for transmitting the at least one second PPDU or a MCS for transmitting the at least one second PPDU.

其中,上述第二参数表示的功率低于第一参数表示的功率,或者,第二参数表示的MCS低于第一参数表示的MCS。The power represented by the second parameter is lower than the power represented by the first parameter, or the MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter.

具体地,MCS包括编码率和/或调制阶数,上述第二参数表示的MCS低于第一参数表示的MCS包括:第二参数表示的编码率低于第一参数表示的编码率和/或第二参数表示的调制阶数低于第一参数表示的调制阶数。Specifically, the MCS includes a coding rate and/or a modulation order. The MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter, which includes: the coding rate represented by the second parameter is lower than the coding rate represented by the first parameter and/or the modulation order represented by the second parameter is lower than the modulation order represented by the first parameter.

具体地,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是与至少一个第一PPDU属于相同业务的PPDU,上述至少一个第二PPDU也可以是新业务的PPDU,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the at least one second PPDU may be a PPDU belonging to the same service as the at least one first PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU may also be a PPDU of a new service, which is not limited in the present application.

具体地,上述第一信息可以是占先信号。Specifically, the above-mentioned first information may be a preemptive signal.

可选地,上述第一信息还用于指示第二站点请求使用上述第一信道。Optionally, the first information is also used to indicate that the second site requests to use the first channel.

当发送站点的业务传输被占先时,通过降低原业务的传输参数的方式保持原业务的继续传输,可以降低对原有传输的影响。When the service transmission of the sending station is preempted, the transmission parameters of the original service can be reduced to maintain the transmission of the original service, thereby reducing the impact on the original transmission.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息 的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The transmission period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the transmission or reception of the first information The period, time interval for sending or receiving the above-mentioned first information.

其中,上述时间间隔也可以理解为时间窗。The above time interval can also be understood as a time window.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, there is a first time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, and the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at the first time interval.

上述第一时间间隔可以为PROP。The first time interval mentioned above may be PROP.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占先信号。The sending site (i.e., the first site mentioned above) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与上述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, there is a first time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at the first time interval.

上述至少一个第一PPDU中任意的两个相邻第一PPDU之间存在时间间隔#1,因此至少一个第一PPDU之间存在多个时间间隔#1,该多个时间间隔#1为PROP,上述第一时间间隔可以为其中的一个PROP。There is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent first PPDUs in the at least one first PPDU mentioned above, so there are multiple time intervals #1 between at least one first PPDU, and the multiple time intervals #1 are PROPs, and the first time interval mentioned above can be one of the PROPs.

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期可以认为是PP,该PP也可以理解为PROP的周期。The transmission period of the at least one first PPDU mentioned above may be considered as PP, and the PP may also be understood as the period of PROP.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占先信号。The sending site (i.e., the first site mentioned above) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.

结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,上述第一时间间隔还包括第二时间和第三时间,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从接收状态转换为发送状态,上述第一站点接收第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the first time interval also includes a second time and a third time, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, and the first site receiving the first information includes: the first site receives the first information at a time interval in the first time interval other than the second time and the third time.

可选地,上述至少一个第一PPDU还可以包括第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔。Optionally, the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送站点的发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔发送占先信号,不仅可以增加发送站点检测到占先信号的成功率,还可以降低占先站点的资源开销。The sending site (i.e., the first site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state to receive the preemptive signal, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state of the sending site to send the preemptive signal. This can not only increase the success rate of the sending site detecting the preemptive signal, but also reduce the resource overhead of the preemptive site.

第三方面,提供了一种业务传输方法,该方法可以由第二站点执行,或者,也可以由第二站点中的模块(例如芯片或电路)执行,或者,还可以由能实现全部或部分第二站点功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件执行,本申请对此不作限定。On the third aspect, a service transmission method is provided, which can be executed by the second site, or by a module (such as a chip or circuit) in the second site, or by a logical node, logical module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the second site, and the present application does not limit this.

该方法包括:第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输;第二站点使用第三信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,该第三信道是第一信道的一部分,该第一信道用于上述第一站点与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU。The method includes: the second site sends first information to the first site, and the first information is used to indicate that the second site requests service transmission; the second site uses a third channel to transmit at least one third PPDU, and the third channel is part of the first channel, and the first channel is used for the above-mentioned first site and the third site to transmit at least one first PPDU.

具体地,上述“第三信道是第一信道的一部分”可以理解为上述第三信道是上述第一信道的部分信道,或者,上述第三信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的一部分,或者,上述第三信道对应的频域资源时上述第一信道对应的频域资源的一部分,或者,上述第三信道对应的频域范围包含于上述第一信道对应的频域范围,或者,上述第三信道是上述第一信道的子信道等。Specifically, the above-mentioned “the third channel is part of the first channel” can be understood as the above-mentioned third channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the bandwidth of the above-mentioned third channel is part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel are part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the above-mentioned third channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel, etc.

具体地,上述第一信息可以是占先信号。Specifically, the above-mentioned first information may be a preemptive signal.

占先站点(即第二站点)使用发送站点(即第一站点)的部分信道进行占先传输,可以保持发送站点的原业务的继续传输,降低对原有传输的影响。The preemptive station (ie, the second station) uses part of the channels of the sending station (ie, the first station) for preemptive transmission, which can maintain the continued transmission of the original service of the sending station and reduce the impact on the original transmission.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information.

其中,上述时间间隔也可以理解为时间窗。The above time interval can also be understood as a time window.

结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,上述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述 第一站点在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In conjunction with the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second site sending the first information to the first site includes: The first station sends the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,上述第一时间间隔是一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在第二信道上传输的PPDU,该第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分。Among them, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, the first time interval is the time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, the second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the second channel, and the second channel is a part of the first channel.

具体地,上述“第二信道是第一信道的一部分”可以理解为上述第二信道是上述第一信道的部分信道,或者,上述第二信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的一部分,或者,上述第二信道对应的频域资源时上述第一信道对应的频域资源的一部分,或者,上述第二信道对应的频域范围包含于上述第一信道对应的频域范围,或者,上述第二信道是上述第一信道的子信道等。Specifically, the above-mentioned “the second channel is a part of the first channel” can be understood as the above-mentioned second channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the bandwidth of the above-mentioned second channel is a part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel are a part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel, or, the above-mentioned second channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel, etc.

具体地,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是与至少一个第一PPDU属于相同业务的PPDU,上述至少一个第二PPDU也可以是新业务的PPDU,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the at least one second PPDU may be a PPDU belonging to the same service as the at least one first PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU may also be a PPDU of a new service, which is not limited in the present application.

上述第一时间间隔可以为占先机会(preemption opportunity,PROP)。The above-mentioned first time interval can be a preemption opportunity (PROP).

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占先信号。The sending site (i.e., the first site mentioned above) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.

结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,上述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述第二站点在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In combination with the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second station sending the first information to the first station includes: the second station sending the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该至少一个第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在第二信道上传输的PPDU,该第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分。In which, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the second channel, and the second channel is a part of the first channel.

上述至少一个第一PPDU中任意的两个相邻第一PPDU之间存在时间间隔#1,因此至少一个第一PPDU之间存在多个时间间隔#1,该多个时间间隔#1为PROP,上述第一时间间隔可以为其中的一个PROP。There is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent first PPDUs in the at least one first PPDU mentioned above, so there are multiple time intervals #1 between at least one first PPDU, and the multiple time intervals #1 are PROPs, and the first time interval mentioned above can be one of the PROPs.

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期可以认为是PP,该PP也可以理解为PROP的周期。The transmission period of the at least one first PPDU mentioned above may be considered as PP, and the PP may also be understood as the period of PROP.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占先信号。The sending site (i.e., the first site mentioned above) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.

结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,上述第二站点在上述第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息包括:上述第二站点在上述第一时间间隔中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔发送上述第一信息,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从接收状态转换为发送状态。In combination with the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the second station sending the first information at the first time interval includes: the second station sending the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first station to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first station to switch from a receiving state to a sending state.

可选地,上述至少一个第一PPDU还可以包括第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔。Optionally, the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送站点的发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔发送占先信号,不仅可以增加发送站点检测到占先信号的成功率,还可以降低占先站点的资源开销。The sending site (i.e., the first site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state to receive the preemptive signal, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state of the sending site to send the preemptive signal. This can not only increase the success rate of the sending site detecting the preemptive signal, but also reduce the resource overhead of the preemptive site.

结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,上述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述第二站点在第四信道向第一站点发送上述第一信息。In combination with the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second station sending the first information to the first station includes: the second station sending the first information to the first station on a fourth channel.

具体地,上述第二站点在第四信道向上述第一站点发送第一信息表明第二站点想要占用第四信道进行占先传输,此处的第四信道与上述第二站点请求使用的第三信道可以相同或部分相同或完全不同。Specifically, the second station sends the first information to the first station on the fourth channel to indicate that the second station wants to occupy the fourth channel for preemptive transmission. The fourth channel here may be the same as, partially the same as, or completely different from the third channel requested by the second station.

占先站点(即第二站点)可以通过承载占先信号的信道来指示想要进行占先传输的信道,即可以保证占先传输的进行还可以保证原先传输不中断。The preemptive station (ie, the second station) can indicate the channel on which it wants to preempt transmission through a channel carrying a preemptive signal, which can ensure that the preemptive transmission is carried out and that the original transmission is not interrupted.

结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的高频段部分,或者,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的低频段部分,或者,上述第四信道的带宽小于或等于上述第一信道的带宽的一半。In combination with the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the fourth channel is in the high frequency band of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel.

通过对占先站点(即第二站点)发送上述第四信道进行一定的限定,避免占先站点发送上述第一信息的第四信道占用过多导致原有的传输中断的情况发生。 By imposing certain restrictions on the fourth channel sent by the first station (ie, the second station), it is avoided that the fourth channel used by the first station to send the first information is occupied too much, resulting in the interruption of the original transmission.

结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,当上述第一站点的主信道与上述第二站点的主信道相同时,上述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述第二站点在该主信道上向第一站点发送第一信息;上述方法还包括:第二站点接收来自第一站点的第二信息,该第二信息用于指示切换第一站点的主信道,第二信道包括切换之后的第一站点的主信道。In combination with the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, when the main channel of the first site is the same as the main channel of the second site, the second site sending the first information to the first site includes: the second site sending the first information to the first site on the main channel; the method also includes: the second site receives second information from the first site, the second information is used to indicate switching the main channel of the first site, and the second channel includes the main channel of the first site after switching.

更进一步地,上述第二信息还用于指示切换之后的上述第一站点的主信道。Furthermore, the second information is also used to indicate the primary channel of the first site after the switch.

在发送站点(即第一站点)与占先站点(即第二站点)的主信道相同的情况下,发送站点收到占先信号后会切换其主信道,发送站点的原先传输也切换到发送站点切换之后的主信道上进行,保证发送站点的原先传输不中断。When the main channels of the sending site (i.e., the first site) and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site) are the same, the sending site will switch its main channel after receiving the preemptive signal, and the original transmission of the sending site will also be switched to the main channel after the sending site switches, ensuring that the original transmission of the sending site is not interrupted.

具体地,上述第二信息可以携带在发送站点的任意无线帧中进行发送,本申请对此不作限定。示例性地,该第二信息可以携带在上述至少一个第二PPDU中进行发送,更具体地,该第二信息可以携带在上述至少一个第二PPDU中第一个发送的第二PPDU中进行发送。Specifically, the second information can be carried in any wireless frame of the sending site for transmission, and this application does not limit this. Exemplarily, the second information can be carried in the at least one second PPDU for transmission, and more specifically, the second information can be carried in the first second PPDU sent in the at least one second PPDU for transmission.

结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,上述至少一个第二PPDU还可以包括第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上述第二信道。In combination with the third aspect, in certain implementations of the third aspect, the at least one second PPDU may further include second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel.

示例性地,上述第二指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第二PPDU中第一个发送的第二PPDU中进行发送。Exemplarily, the second indication information may be carried in the first second PPDU sent among the at least one second PPDU.

具体地,上述第二站点请求使用的第三信道可以通过如下三种方式确定:Specifically, the third channel requested to be used by the second station can be determined in the following three ways:

方式一:上述第二站点根据上述第一信道确定第三信道。Method 1: The second station determines the third channel according to the first channel.

具体地,上述第三信道是根据上述第一信道预定义的。Specifically, the third channel is predefined according to the first channel.

方式二:上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示第三信道。Mode 2: The at least one first PPDU includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate a third channel.

示例性地,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU的部分或全部PPDU中,例如,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU中第一个发送的第一PPDU中。Exemplarily, the third indication information may be carried in part or all of the at least one first PPDU. For example, the third indication information may be carried in the first PPDU sent among the at least one first PPDU.

方式三:上述第一站点与上述第二站点通过协商确定上述第三信道,具体步骤如下:Method 3: The first station and the second station determine the third channel through negotiation, and the specific steps are as follows:

上述第二站点接收来自第一站点的第四信息,该第四信息用于指示第三信道的配置信息。The second site receives fourth information from the first site, where the fourth information is used to indicate configuration information of the third channel.

具体地,上述第三信道的配置信息包括第三信道的带宽位置和带宽大小等信息。Specifically, the configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel.

可选地,上述第二站点向上述第一站点发送第三信息,该第三信息用于请求上述第三信道的配置信息。Optionally, the second site sends third information to the first site, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel.

上述方式三的协商过程在第二站点需要传输上述至少一个第三PPDU之前完成即可,具体的协商时间本申请对此不作限定。The negotiation process of the above-mentioned method three only needs to be completed before the second site needs to transmit the above-mentioned at least one third PPDU, and the specific negotiation time is not limited in this application.

通过上述三种方式可以使得第二站点获知第三信道,保证占先传输的正常进行。The above three methods can enable the second station to learn the third channel, thereby ensuring normal preemptive transmission.

第四方面,提供了一种业务传输方法,该方法可以由第二站点执行,或者,也可以由第二站点中的模块(例如芯片或电路)执行,或者,还可以由能实现全部或部分第二站点功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件执行,本申请对此不作限定。In a fourth aspect, a service transmission method is provided, which can be executed by the second site, or by a module (such as a chip or circuit) in the second site, or by a logical node, logical module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the second site. The present application does not limit this.

该方法包括:第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输;第二站点基于第三参数使用上述第一信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,该第三参数包括传输至少一个第三PPDU的第一功率或传输至少一个第三PPDU的第一MCS。The method includes: the second station sends first information to the first station, and the first information is used to indicate that the second station requests to transmit a service; the second station uses the above-mentioned first channel to transmit at least one third PPDU based on a third parameter, and the third parameter includes a first power for transmitting at least one third PPDU or a first MCS for transmitting at least one third PPDU.

具体地,第一MCS包括第一编码率和/或第一调制阶数。Specifically, the first MCS includes a first coding rate and/or a first modulation order.

具体地,上述第一信息可以是占先信号。Specifically, the above-mentioned first information may be a preemptive signal.

可选地,上述第一信息还用于指示第二站点请求使用上述第一信道。Optionally, the first information is also used to indicate that the second site requests to use the first channel.

当占先站点需要传输占先业务时,通过使用规定的业务传输的参数,既可以保证占先业务的传输,还可以保持原业务的继续传输,可以降低对原有传输的影响。When the preemptive station needs to transmit the preemptive service, by using the specified service transmission parameters, it can not only ensure the transmission of the preemptive service, but also maintain the continued transmission of the original service, which can reduce the impact on the original transmission.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information.

其中,上述时间间隔也可以理解为时间窗。The above time interval can also be understood as a time window.

结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,上述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述第一站点在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In combination with the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the second site sending the first information to the first site includes: the first site sending the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,上述第一时间间隔是一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在 上述第一信道上传输的PPDU。Wherein, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, the first time interval is the time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, and the second PPDU is the time interval between the first station and the third station in The PPDU transmitted on the above first channel.

具体地,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是与至少一个第一PPDU属于相同业务的PPDU,上述至少一个第二PPDU也可以是新业务的PPDU,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the at least one second PPDU may be a PPDU belonging to the same service as the at least one first PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU may also be a PPDU of a new service, which is not limited in the present application.

上述第一时间间隔可以为PROP。The first time interval mentioned above may be PROP.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占先信号。The sending site (i.e., the first site mentioned above) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.

结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,上述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述第二站点在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In combination with the fourth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourth aspect, the second station sending the first information to the first station includes: the second station sending the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该至少一个第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在上述第一信道上传输的PPDU。In which, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU is the PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the first channel.

上述至少一个第一PPDU中任意的两个相邻第一PPDU之间存在时间间隔#1,因此至少一个第一PPDU之间存在多个时间间隔#1,该多个时间间隔#1为PROP,上述第一时间间隔可以为其中的一个PROP。There is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent first PPDUs in the at least one first PPDU mentioned above, so there are multiple time intervals #1 between at least one first PPDU, and the multiple time intervals #1 are PROPs, and the first time interval mentioned above can be one of the PROPs.

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期可以认为是PP,该PP也可以理解为PROP的周期。The transmission period of the at least one first PPDU mentioned above may be considered as PP, and the PP may also be understood as the period of PROP.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用发送站点发送的PPDU之间的时间间隔发送占先信号,使得发送站点可以检测到占先信号。The sending site (i.e., the first site mentioned above) receives the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site mentioned above) sends the preemptive signal using the time interval between the PPDUs sent by the sending site, so that the sending site can detect the preemptive signal.

结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,上述第二站点在上述第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息包括:上述第二站点在上述第一时间间隔中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔发送上述第一信息,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从接收状态转换为发送状态。In combination with the fourth aspect, in certain implementations of the fourth aspect, the second station sending the first information at the first time interval includes: the second station sending the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first station to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first station to switch from a receiving state to a sending state.

可选地,上述至少一个第一PPDU还可以包括第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔。Optionally, the at least one first PPDU may further include a time interval in the first time interval except the second time and the third time.

发送站点(即上述第一站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔接收占先信号,以及占先站点(即上述第二站点)利用上述第一时间间隔中除发送站点的发送状态与接收状态相互转换的时延之外的时间间隔发送占先信号,不仅可以增加发送站点检测到占先信号的成功率,还可以降低占先站点的资源开销。The sending site (i.e., the first site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state to receive the preemptive signal, and the preemptive site (i.e., the second site) uses the time interval in the first time interval excluding the delay for the conversion between the sending state and the receiving state of the sending site to send the preemptive signal. This can not only increase the success rate of the sending site detecting the preemptive signal, but also reduce the resource overhead of the preemptive site.

第五方面,提供了一种业务传输装置,该装置包括:收发单元,用于使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU;该收发单元还用于接收第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输;该收发单元还用于使用第二信道与上述第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,该第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分。In a fifth aspect, a service transmission device is provided, which includes: a transceiver unit for transmitting at least one first PPDU with a third site using a first channel; the transceiver unit is also used to receive first information, which is used to indicate that the second site requests service transmission; the transceiver unit is also used to transmit at least one second PPDU with the above-mentioned third site using a second channel, and the second channel is part of the above-mentioned first channel.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, there is a first time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, and the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in the first time interval.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与上述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, there is a first time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in the first time interval.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,上述第一时间间隔还包括第二时间和第三时间,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于上述装置从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于上述装置从接收状态转换为发送状态,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the above-mentioned first time interval also includes a second time and a third time, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the above-mentioned device to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the above-mentioned device to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, and the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in a time interval other than the above-mentioned second time and the above-mentioned third time in the first time interval.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单 元用于在第四信道上接收到上述第一信息,该第四信道的上述第一信道的一部分;上述装置还包括:处理单元,用于确定上述第一信道中除上述第四信道之外的信道为上述第二信道。In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in some implementations of the fifth aspect, the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: The unit is used to receive the above-mentioned first information on a fourth channel, and the fourth channel is a part of the above-mentioned first channel; the above-mentioned device also includes: a processing unit, which is used to determine that the channel other than the above-mentioned fourth channel in the above-mentioned first channel is the above-mentioned second channel.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的高频段部分,或者,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的低频段部分,或者,上述第四信道的带宽小于或等于上述第一信道的带宽的一半。In combination with the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the fourth channel is in the high frequency band of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,当上述装置的主信道与上述第二站点的主信道相同时,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在该主信道上接收到第一信息;上述收发单元还用于发送第二信息,该第二信息用于指示切换上述装置的主信道,第二信道包括切换之后的上述装置的主信道。In combination with the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, when the main channel of the above-mentioned device is the same as the main channel of the above-mentioned second site, the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information on the main channel; the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to send second information, and the second information is used to indicate switching the main channel of the above-mentioned device, and the second channel includes the main channel of the above-mentioned device after switching.

更进一步地,上述第二信息还用于指示切换之后的上述装置的主信道。Furthermore, the second information is also used to indicate a primary channel of the device after switching.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,上述至少一个第二PPDU还可以包括第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上述第二信道。In combination with the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the at least one second PPDU may further include second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel.

结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,上述第一信息还用于指示第二站点请求使用第三信道,该第三信道是上述第一信道的一部分。In combination with the fifth aspect, in certain implementations of the fifth aspect, the first information is further used to indicate that the second station requests to use a third channel, which is a part of the first channel.

具体地,上述第二站点请求使用的第三信道可以通过如下三种方式确定:Specifically, the third channel requested to be used by the second station can be determined in the following three ways:

方式一:上述第三信道是根据上述第一信道预定义的。Mode 1: The third channel is predefined based on the first channel.

方式二:上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示第三信道,该第三信道用于上述第二站点传输至少一个第三PPDU。Mode 2: The at least one first PPDU includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate a third channel, and the third channel is used for the second site to transmit at least one third PPDU.

示例性地,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU的部分或全部PPDU中,例如,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU中第一个发送的第一PPDU中。Exemplarily, the third indication information may be carried in part or all of the at least one first PPDU. For example, the third indication information may be carried in the first PPDU sent among the at least one first PPDU.

方式三:上述装置与上述第二站点通过协商确定上述第三信道,具体步骤如下:Mode 3: The device and the second station determine the third channel through negotiation, and the specific steps are as follows:

上述收发单元用于向上述第二站点发送第四信息,该第四信息用于指示第三信道的配置信息。The transceiver unit is used to send fourth information to the second site, where the fourth information is used to indicate configuration information of the third channel.

具体地,上述第三信道的配置信息包括第三信道的带宽位置和带宽大小等信息。Specifically, the configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel.

可选地,上述收发单元用于接收来自第二站点的第三信息,该第三信息用于请求上述第三信道的配置信息。Optionally, the transceiver unit is used to receive third information from the second site, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel.

第五方面提供的业务传输装置相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考第一方面所示的业务传输方法,此处不再赘述。The explanation and beneficial effects of the relevant contents of the service transmission device provided in the fifth aspect can refer to the service transmission method shown in the first aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第六方面,提供了一种业务传输装置,该装置包括:收发单元,用于基于第一参数使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU,该第一参数包括传输至少一个第一PPDU的功率或传输至少一个第一PPDU的调制编码方案(modulation and codingscheme,MCS);该收发单元还用于接收第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输;该收发单元还用于基于第二参数使用第一信道与上述第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,该第一参数包括传输至少一个第二PPDU的功率或传输至少一个第二PPDU的MCS。In a sixth aspect, a service transmission device is provided, the device comprising: a transceiver unit, used to transmit at least one first PPDU to a third site using a first channel based on a first parameter, the first parameter including a power for transmitting at least one first PPDU or a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for transmitting at least one first PPDU; the transceiver unit is also used to receive first information, the first information being used to indicate that a second site requests service transmission; the transceiver unit is also used to transmit at least one second PPDU to the third site using the first channel based on a second parameter, the first parameter including a power for transmitting at least one second PPDU or a MCS for transmitting at least one second PPDU.

其中,上述第二参数表示的功率低于第一参数表示的功率,或者,第二参数表示的MCS低于第一参数表示的MCS。The power represented by the second parameter is lower than the power represented by the first parameter, or the MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter.

具体地,MCS包括编码率和/或调制阶数,上述第二参数表示的MCS低于第一参数表示的MCS包括:第二参数表示的编码率低于第一参数表示的编码率和/或第二参数表示的调制阶数低于第一参数表示的调制阶数。Specifically, the MCS includes a coding rate and/or a modulation order. The MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter, which includes: the coding rate represented by the second parameter is lower than the coding rate represented by the first parameter and/or the modulation order represented by the second parameter is lower than the modulation order represented by the first parameter.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information.

结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the sixth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixth aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, there is a first time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, and the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in the first time interval.

结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与上述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔接收第一信息。 In combination with the sixth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixth aspect, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, there is a first time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in the first time interval.

结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,上述第一时间间隔还包括第二时间和第三时间,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从接收状态转换为发送状态,上述收发单元用于接收第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔中除上述第二时间和上述第三时间之外的时间间隔接收第一信息。In combination with the sixth aspect, in certain implementations of the sixth aspect, the above-mentioned first time interval also includes a second time and a third time, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, and the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to receive the first information in a time interval other than the above-mentioned second time and the above-mentioned third time in the first time interval.

第六方面提供的业务传输装置相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考第二方面所示的业务传输方法,此处不再赘述。The explanation and beneficial effects of the relevant contents of the service transmission device provided in the sixth aspect can be referred to the service transmission method shown in the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第七方面,提供了一种业务传输装置,该装置包括:收发单元,用于向第一站点发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示该装置请求进行业务传输;该收发单元还用于使用第三信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,该第三信道是第一信道的一部分,该第一信道用于上述第一站点与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU。In the seventh aspect, a service transmission device is provided, which includes: a transceiver unit for sending first information to a first site, the first information being used to indicate that the device requests service transmission; the transceiver unit is also used to transmit at least one third PPDU using a third channel, the third channel being part of the first channel, and the first channel being used to transmit at least one first PPDU between the above-mentioned first site and the third site.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information.

结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In combination with the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the transceiver unit is used to send the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,上述第一时间间隔是一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在第二信道上传输的PPDU,该第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分。Among them, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, the first time interval is the time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, the second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the second channel, and the second channel is a part of the first channel.

结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In combination with the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the transceiver unit is used to send the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该至少一个第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在第二信道上传输的PPDU,该第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分。In which, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the second channel, and the second channel is a part of the first channel.

结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于在上述第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在上述第一时间间隔中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔发送上述第一信息,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从接收状态转换为发送状态。In combination with the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the above-mentioned first information in the above-mentioned first time interval, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the above-mentioned first information in the time interval other than the second time and the third time in the above-mentioned first time interval, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a receiving state to a sending state.

结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第四信道向第一站点发送上述第一信息。In combination with the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site on a fourth channel.

结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的高频段部分,或者,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的低频段部分,或者,上述第四信道的带宽小于或等于上述第一信道的带宽的一半。In combination with the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the fourth channel is in the high frequency band of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel.

结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,当上述第一站点的主信道与上述装置的主信道相同时,上述收发单元用于向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在该主信道上向第一站点发送第一信息;上述收发单元还用于接收来自第一站点的第二信息,该第二信息用于指示切换第一站点的主信道,第二信道包括切换之后的第一站点的主信道。In combination with the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, when the main channel of the above-mentioned first site is the same as the main channel of the above-mentioned device, the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site on the main channel; the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to receive second information from the first site, and the second information is used to indicate switching the main channel of the first site, and the second channel includes the main channel of the first site after switching.

更进一步地,上述第二信息还用于指示切换之后的上述第一站点的主信道。Furthermore, the second information is also used to indicate the primary channel of the first site after the switch.

结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,上述至少一个第二PPDU还可以包括第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上述第二信道。In combination with the seventh aspect, in certain implementations of the seventh aspect, the at least one second PPDU may further include second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel.

具体地,上述装置请求使用的第三信道可以通过如下三种方式确定:Specifically, the third channel requested to be used by the above device can be determined in the following three ways:

方式一:上述装置还包括:处理单元,用于根据上述第一信道确定第三信道。Mode 1: The above-mentioned device further includes: a processing unit, configured to determine a third channel according to the above-mentioned first channel.

具体地,上述第三信道是根据上述第一信道预定义的。Specifically, the third channel is predefined according to the first channel.

方式二:上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示第三信道。Mode 2: The at least one first PPDU includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate a third channel.

示例性地,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU的部分或全部PPDU中,例如,上述第三指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第一PPDU中第一个发送的第一PPDU中。Exemplarily, the third indication information may be carried in part or all of the at least one first PPDU. For example, the third indication information may be carried in the first PPDU sent among the at least one first PPDU.

方式三:上述第一站点与上述装置通过协商确定上述第三信道,具体步骤如下:Method 3: The first station and the device determine the third channel through negotiation, and the specific steps are as follows:

上述收发单元用于接收来自第一站点的第四信息,该第四信息用于指示第三信道的配置信息。The transceiver unit is used to receive fourth information from the first site, where the fourth information is used to indicate configuration information of the third channel.

具体地,上述第三信道的配置信息包括第三信道的带宽位置和带宽大小等信息。 Specifically, the configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel.

可选地,上述收发单元还用于向上述第一站点发送第三信息,该第三信息用于请求上述第三信道的配置信息。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further used to send third information to the first site, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel.

第七方面提供的业务传输装置相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考第三方面所示的业务传输方法,此处不再赘述。The explanation and beneficial effects of the relevant contents of the service transmission device provided in the seventh aspect can be referred to the service transmission method shown in the third aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第八方面,提供了一种业务传输装置,该装置包括:收发单元,用于向第一站点发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示该装置请求进行业务传输;该收发单元还用于基于第三参数使用第一信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,该第一信道用于上述第一站点与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU,该第三参数包括传输至少一个第三PPDU的第一功率或传输至少一个第三PPDU的第一MCS。In the eighth aspect, a service transmission device is provided, which includes: a transceiver unit for sending first information to a first site, the first information being used to indicate that the device requests service transmission; the transceiver unit is also used to transmit at least one third PPDU using a first channel based on a third parameter, the first channel being used for transmitting at least one first PPDU between the above-mentioned first site and the third site, and the third parameter including a first power for transmitting at least one third PPDU or a first MCS for transmitting at least one third PPDU.

具体地,上述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:Specifically, the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、上述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information.

结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In combination with the eighth aspect, in certain implementations of the eighth aspect, the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the transceiver unit is used to send the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,上述第一时间间隔是一个第一PPDU与一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在上述第一信道上传输的PPDU。Among them, when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, the first time interval is the time interval between a first PPDU and a second PPDU, and the second PPDU is the PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the first channel.

结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于向第一站点发送第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息。In combination with the eighth aspect, in certain implementations of the eighth aspect, the transceiver unit is used to send the first information to the first site, including: the transceiver unit is used to send the first information at a first time interval.

其中,当上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,该至少一个第二PPDU是上述第一站点与上述第三站点在上述第一信道上传输的PPDU。In which, when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU is the PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on the first channel.

结合第八方面,在第八方面的某些实现方式中,上述收发单元用于在上述第一时间间隔发送上述第一信息包括:上述收发单元用于在上述第一时间间隔中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔发送上述第一信息,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从发送状态转换为接收状态,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于第一站点从接收状态转换为发送状态。In combination with the eighth aspect, in certain implementations of the eighth aspect, the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the above-mentioned first information in the above-mentioned first time interval, including: the above-mentioned transceiver unit is used to send the above-mentioned first information in the above-mentioned first time interval except the second time and the third time, the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for the first site to switch from a receiving state to a sending state.

第八方面提供的业务传输装置相关内容的解释及有益效果均可参考第四方面所示的业务传输方法,此处不再赘述。The explanation and beneficial effects of the relevant contents of the service transmission device provided in the eighth aspect can be referred to the service transmission method shown in the fourth aspect, and will not be repeated here.

第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器,该处理器用于,通过执行计算机程序或指令或者通过逻辑电路,使得该通信装置执行第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能中所述的方法;或者使得该通信装置执行第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能中所述的方法;使得该通信装置执行第三方面以及第三方面的任一种可能中所述的方法;或者使得该通信装置执行第四方面以及第四方面的任一种可能中所述的方法。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising a processor, wherein the processor is used to, by executing a computer program or instruction or through a logic circuit, enable the communication device to perform the method described in the first aspect and any possibility of the first aspect; or enable the communication device to perform the method described in the second aspect and any possibility of the second aspect; enable the communication device to perform the method described in the third aspect and any possibility of the third aspect; or enable the communication device to perform the method described in the fourth aspect and any possibility of the fourth aspect.

一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置还包括存储器,其用于存储该计算机程序或指令。In a possible implementation, the communication device further includes a memory for storing the computer program or instruction.

一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置还包括通信接口,其用于输入和/或输出信号。In a possible implementation manner, the communication device further includes a communication interface, which is used to input and/or output signals.

第十方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括逻辑电路和输入输出接口,该输入输出接口用于输入和/或输出信号,该逻辑电路用于执行第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能中所述的方法;或者,该逻辑电路用于执行第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能中所述的方法;该逻辑电路用于执行第三方面以及第三方面的任一种可能中所述的方法;或者,该逻辑电路用于执行第四方面以及第四方面的任一种可能中所述的方法。In the tenth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising a logic circuit and an input/output interface, the input/output interface being used to input and/or output signals, the logic circuit being used to execute the method described in the first aspect and any possibility of the first aspect; or, the logic circuit being used to execute the method described in the second aspect and any possibility of the second aspect; the logic circuit being used to execute the method described in the third aspect and any possibility of the third aspect; or, the logic circuit being used to execute the method described in the fourth aspect and any possibility of the fourth aspect.

第十一方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或该指令在计算机上运行时,使得第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行;或者,使得第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行;使得第三方面以及第三方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行;或者,使得第四方面以及第四方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行。In the eleventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, on which a computer program or instruction is stored. When the computer program or the instruction is run on a computer, the method described in the first aspect and any possibility of the first aspect is executed; or, the method described in the second aspect and any possibility of the second aspect is executed; the method described in the third aspect and any possibility of the third aspect is executed; or, the method described in the fourth aspect and any possibility of the fourth aspect is executed.

第十二方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包含指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行;或者,使得第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行;使得第三方面以及第三方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行;或者,使得第四方面以及第四方面的任一种可能中所述的方法被执行。 In the twelfth aspect, a computer program product is provided, comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the method described in the first aspect and any possibility of the first aspect to be executed; or, cause the method described in the second aspect and any possibility of the second aspect to be executed; cause the method described in the third aspect and any possibility of the third aspect to be executed; or, cause the method described in the fourth aspect and any possibility of the fourth aspect to be executed.

第十三方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第一站点和上述第二站点,该第一站点用于执行上述第一方面以及第一方面的任一种可能中所述的方法或者该第一站点用于执行上述第二方面以及第二方面的任一种可能中所述的方法,该第二站点用于执行上述第三方面以及第三方面的任一种可能中所述的方法或者该第二站点用于执行上述第四方面以及第四方面的任一种可能中所述的方法。In the thirteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes the above-mentioned first site and the above-mentioned second site, the first site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned first aspect and any possibility of the first aspect, or the first site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned second aspect and any possibility of the second aspect, the second site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned third aspect and any possibility of the third aspect, or the second site is used to execute the method described in the above-mentioned fourth aspect and any possibility of the fourth aspect.

关于第五方面至第十三方面的有益效果的描述可以参见第一方面至第四方面的描述。For the description of the beneficial effects of the fifth to thirteenth aspects, reference can be made to the description of the first to fourth aspects.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1是适用于本申请实施例的一例网络架构100的示意图。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of an example network architecture 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图2是适用于本申请实施例提供的一种业务传输方法200的示意性流程图。FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a service transmission method 200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图3是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法200的示意图。FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a service transmission method 200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图4是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法200的另一种示意图。FIG. 4 is another schematic diagram of a service transmission method 200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图5是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法200的再一种示意图。FIG. 5 is another schematic diagram of the service transmission method 200 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.

图6是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法200的再一种示意图。FIG. 6 is another schematic diagram of the service transmission method 200 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.

图7是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法200的再一种示意图。FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of the service transmission method 200 applicable to the embodiment of the present application.

图8是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法300的示意性流程图。FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a service transmission method 300 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图9是适用于本申请实施例提供的一种业务传输方法800的示意性流程图。FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a service transmission method 800 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图10是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法800的一种示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a service transmission method 800 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图11是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法800的另一种示意图。FIG. 11 is another schematic diagram of a service transmission method 800 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图12是适用于本申请实施例提供的业务传输方法900的示意性流程图。FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a service transmission method 900 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图13是适用于本申请实施例的一例通信装置1100的示意性框图。FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a communication device 1100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图14是适用于本申请实施例的一例通信装置1200的示意性框图。FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram of an example communication device 1200 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

图15是适用于本申请实施例的一例通信装置1300的示意性框图。FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a communication device 1300 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.

本申请实施例可以应用于无线局域网(wireless local area network,WLAN),目前WLAN采用的标准为电气和电子工程协会(institute of electrical and electronics engineer,IEEE)802.11系列。WLAN可以包括多个基本服务集(basic service set,BSS),BSS中的网络节点为站点(station,STA)和接入点(access point,AP)。每个BSS可以包含一个AP和多个关联于该AP的STA。The embodiments of the present application can be applied to a wireless local area network (WLAN). The current standard adopted by WLAN is the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 series. A WLAN may include multiple basic service sets (BSSs), and the network nodes in the BSSs are stations (STAs) and access points (APs). Each BSS may include an AP and multiple STAs associated with the AP.

本申请实施例中的AP也可以称之为无线访问接入点或热点等。AP是移动用户进入有线网络的接入点,主要部署于家庭、大楼内部以及园区内部,典型覆盖半径为几十米至上百米,当然,也可以部署于户外。AP相当于一个连接有线网和无线网的桥梁,其主要作用是将各个无线网络客户端连接到一起,然后将无线网络接入以太网。具体地,AP可以为支持802.11ax制式的设备,进一步可选地,AP可以为支持802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a或后续版本等多种WLAN制式的设备。The AP in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as a wireless access point or hotspot, etc. AP is an access point for mobile users to enter a wired network. It is mainly deployed in homes, buildings, and parks. The typical coverage radius is tens of meters to hundreds of meters. Of course, it can also be deployed outdoors. AP is equivalent to a bridge connecting a wired network and a wireless network. Its main function is to connect various wireless network clients together and then connect the wireless network to the Ethernet. Specifically, the AP can be a device that supports the 802.11ax standard. Further optionally, the AP can be a device that supports multiple WLAN standards such as 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a or subsequent versions.

本申请实施例中的STA可以是无线通讯芯片、无线传感器或无线通信终端。例如:支持Wi-Fi通讯功能的移动电话、支持Wi-Fi通讯功能的平板电脑、支持Wi-Fi通讯功能的机顶盒、支持Wi-Fi通讯功能的智能电视、支持Wi-Fi通讯功能的智能可穿戴设备、支持Wi-Fi通讯功能的车载通信设备和支持Wi-Fi通讯功能的计算机。可选地,STA可以支持802.11ax制式,进一步可选地,STA可以支持802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a或后续版本等多种WLAN制式。The STA in the embodiment of the present application can be a wireless communication chip, a wireless sensor or a wireless communication terminal. For example: a mobile phone that supports Wi-Fi communication function, a tablet computer that supports Wi-Fi communication function, a set-top box that supports Wi-Fi communication function, a smart TV that supports Wi-Fi communication function, a smart wearable device that supports Wi-Fi communication function, a vehicle-mounted communication device that supports Wi-Fi communication function, and a computer that supports Wi-Fi communication function. Optionally, STA can support the 802.11ax standard, and further optionally, STA can support multiple WLAN standards such as 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b and 802.11a or subsequent versions.

在本申请实施例中,STA或AP包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且,本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是STA或AP,或者,是STA或AP中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。 In the embodiment of the present application, the STA or AP includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. The hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory). The operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a windows operating system. The application layer includes applications such as a browser, an address book, a word processing software, and an instant messaging software. In addition, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, as long as it can communicate according to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application by running a program that records the code of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, for example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be a STA or an AP, or a functional module in a STA or an AP that can call and execute a program.

另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatiledisc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "product" used in this application covers computer programs that can be accessed from any computer-readable device, carrier or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (e.g., hard disks, floppy disks or tapes, etc.), optical disks (e.g., compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs), etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (e.g., erasable programmable read-only memories (EPROMs), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing and/or carrying instructions and/or data.

图1是适用于本申请实施例的无线局域网的网络架构100的示意图。该网络架构100中包括接入点AP110和接入点AP 120,可选地,该网络架构100还可以包括与接入点AP110关联的站点STA111、STA 112、STA 113以及与接入点AP 120关联的站点STA 121、STA 122、STA 123。其中,接入点AP110、站点STA111、STA 112、STA 113构成基本服务集1(basic service set,BSS1),接入点AP 120、STA 121、STA 122、STA 123构成BSS2。一个示例中,AP 110和AP120可以协作传输,为相同或者不同的用户提供上行或者下行传输服务。应理解,图1只是示例性的,不应该对本申请适用的无线局域网的网络架构产生限制,例如,该网络架构还可以包括更多的AP,每个AP还可以与更多的STA关联,本申请实施例在此不做限定。FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture 100 of a wireless local area network applicable to an embodiment of the present application. The network architecture 100 includes access points AP110 and AP120. Optionally, the network architecture 100 may also include stations STA111, STA112, STA113 associated with access point AP110 and stations STA121, STA122, STA123 associated with access point AP120. Among them, access point AP110, stations STA111, STA112, STA113 constitute basic service set 1 (basic service set, BSS1), and access points AP120, STA121, STA122, STA123 constitute BSS2. In an example, AP110 and AP120 can cooperate in transmission to provide uplink or downlink transmission services for the same or different users. It should be understood that Figure 1 is only exemplary and should not limit the network architecture of the wireless local area network to which the present application is applicable. For example, the network architecture may also include more APs, and each AP may be associated with more STAs. The embodiments of the present application are not limited here.

上述网络架构100中的AP可以认为是AP类的站点,上述网络架构100中的STA可以认为是非接入点类的站点(none access point station,non-AP STA)。The AP in the above network architecture 100 can be considered as an AP-type station, and the STA in the above network architecture 100 can be considered as a non-access point-type station (none access point station, non-AP STA).

低时延是当前业务传输的一个重要研究目标,尤其地,实时业务(real time application,RAT)对于低时延传输的要求更加严格,甚至出现了小于几毫秒的超低时延以及超高可靠性(ultra high reliability,UHR)的要求。为了确保RAT的低时延传输,当前引入了占先(preemption)技术。Low latency is an important research goal for current business transmission. In particular, real-time applications (RAT) have stricter requirements for low latency transmission, and even require ultra-low latency of less than a few milliseconds and ultra-high reliability (UHR). In order to ensure low latency transmission of RAT, preemption technology is currently introduced.

具体地,上述占先技术可以分为物理层协议数据单元(physical protocol data unit,PPDU)级别的占先和传输机会(transmission opportunity,TXOP)级别的占先。Specifically, the above-mentioned preemptive technology can be divided into preemption at the physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) level and preemption at the transmission opportunity (TXOP) level.

其中,PPDU级别的占先具体是:发送站点在传输非低时延业务数据包的过程中,如果其它站点有超低时延业务数据包的传输要求,那么发送站点中断当前PPDU的传输并允许其它站点进行超低时延业务数据包的传输;在超低时延业务数据包的传输完毕之后再继续进行非低时延业务数据包的传输。Among them, the PPDU level preemption is specifically: when the sending site is transmitting non-low-latency service data packets, if other sites have transmission requirements for ultra-low-latency service data packets, the sending site interrupts the current PPDU transmission and allows other sites to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets; after the transmission of the ultra-low-latency service data packets is completed, the transmission of the non-low-latency service data packets will continue.

其中,TXOP级别的占先具体是:发送站点在一个TXOP内传输非低时延业务数据包的过程中,如果其它站点有超低时延业务数据包的传输要求,那么发送站点可以在该TXOP内完成当前PPDU的传输后允许其它站点可以在同一个TXOP进行超低时延业务数据包的传输。Among them, the TXOP level preemption specifically means that when the sending station is transmitting non-low-latency service data packets within a TXOP, if other stations have transmission requirements for ultra-low-latency service data packets, the sending station can complete the transmission of the current PPDU within the TXOP and allow other stations to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets in the same TXOP.

无论对于上述哪种占先,发送站点在进行业务传输时,其它站点对该发送站点进行占先会导致该发送站点的传输中断,对发送站点的原有传输会造成一定的影响。本申请实施例提供一种业务传输方法200,可以降低其它站点的占先对发送站点的原有传输的影响。Regardless of the above-mentioned preemption, when the sending station is transmitting services, other stations preempting the sending station will cause the transmission of the sending station to be interrupted, which will have a certain impact on the original transmission of the sending station. The embodiment of the present application provides a service transmission method 200, which can reduce the impact of other stations' preemption on the original transmission of the sending station.

图2所示的业务传输的方法200中的发送站点在检测到其它站点的占先信号后减少原先传输的信道,并预留出一部分信道供其它站点的占先传输使用,既可以确保发送站点的原先传输的进行,又可以确保其它站点的占先传输的进行。In the service transmission method 200 shown in Figure 2, the sending site reduces the original transmission channel after detecting the preemptive signal of other sites, and reserves a part of the channel for the preemptive transmission of other sites, which can ensure both the original transmission of the sending site and the preemptive transmission of other sites.

示例性地,下述业务传输方法200中的第一站点(即发送站点)可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点(即其它站点)可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的AP 120;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 111以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 111以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 112等,本申请对第一站点与第二站点的具体形态不作限定。可以看出,第一站点与第二站点可以属于相同BSS,也可以属于不同BSS。Exemplarily, the first station (i.e., the sending station) in the following service transmission method 200 may be the AP 110 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station (i.e., the other station) may be the AP 120 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100; or, the first station may be the AP 110 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station may be the STA 121 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100; or, the first station may be the STA 111 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station may be the STA 121 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100; or, the first station may be the STA 111 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station may be the STA 112 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, etc., and the present application does not limit the specific forms of the first station and the second station. It can be seen that the first station and the second station may belong to the same BSS or to different BSSs.

具体地,当第一站点与第二站点属于相同BSS时,第一站点在接收占先信号前,第一站点可以在第一站点与第二站点所属BSS的主信道与次信道上进行原先传输;第一站点接收到占先信号后,第一站点可能会预留出第一站点与第二站点所属BSS的次信道供第二站点进行占先传输使用。Specifically, when the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS, before receiving the preemptive signal, the first site may perform the original transmission on the main channel and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong; after the first site receives the preemptive signal, the first site may reserve the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong for the second site to use for preemptive transmission.

当第一站点与第二站点分别属于不同BSS时,第一站点在接收占先信号前,第一站点可以在第一站点所属BSS的主信道、次信道以及第二站点所属BSS的主信道、次信道上进行原先传输;第一站点接收到第一信息后,第一站点至少会预留出第二站点所属BSS的主信道供第二站点进行占先传输使用。When the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs respectively, before receiving the preemptive signal, the first site may perform original transmission on the main channel and secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs and the main channel and secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs; after the first site receives the first information, the first site will at least reserve the main channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs for the second site to use for preemptive transmission.

图2是本申请实施例的业务传输方法200的示意性流程图。需要说明的是,图2中以第一站点和第二 站点作为该交互性示意的执行主体来示意该方法,但本申请并不限制该交互示意的执行主体。示例性地,图2中的第一站点和第二站点也可以是支持其实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统或处理器等,还可以是实现全部或部分其功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件。具体地,该业务传输方法200包括:FIG2 is a schematic flow chart of a service transmission method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application. The site is used as the execution subject of the interactive illustration to illustrate the method, but the present application does not limit the execution subject of the interactive illustration. Exemplarily, the first site and the second site in FIG. 2 may also be chips, chip systems or processors that support the implementation of the method, or may be logical nodes, logical modules or software that implement all or part of its functions. Specifically, the service transmission method 200 includes:

步骤S210,第一站点使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU。In step S210 , the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using the first channel.

具体地,上述第一信道的带宽可以是20MHz、40MHz、80MHz、160MHz、320MHz、640MHz等任意带宽,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the bandwidth of the first channel may be any bandwidth such as 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 320 MHz, 640 MHz, etc., and this application does not limit this.

示例性地,当第一站点与上述第二站点属于相同BSS时,该第一信道可以是上述第一站点与第二站点所属BSS的主信道与次信道。当第一站点与上述第二站点属于不同BSS时,该第一信道可以是上述第一站点所属BSS的主信道、次信道以及第二站点所属BSS的主信道、次信道。Exemplarily, when the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS, the first channel may be the primary channel and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong. When the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs, the first channel may be the primary channel and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs and the primary channel and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs.

步骤S212,第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输。相应地,第一站点接收该第一信息。Step S212: The second site sends first information to the first site, where the first information is used to indicate that the second site requests service transmission. Correspondingly, the first site receives the first information.

示例性地,上述第一信息可以是上述占先信号,该占先信号可以是短训练字段(short training field,STF),或者,该占先信号可以是STF+长训练字段(long training field,LTF),或者,该占先信号可以是STF+LTF+信令字段(signal field,SIG)。Exemplarily, the first information may be the preemptive signal, and the preemptive signal may be a short training field (STF), or the preemptive signal may be STF+long training field (LTF), or the preemptive signal may be STF+LTF+signaling field (SIG).

可选地,上述第一信息还用于指示第二站点请求使用第三信道。示例性地,上述第二站点可以请求使用该第三信道与第四站点传输至少一个第三PPDU。Optionally, the first information is further used to indicate that the second station requests to use the third channel. Exemplarily, the second station may request to use the third channel to transmit at least one third PPDU with the fourth station.

步骤S214,第一站点使用第二信道与上述第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,该第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分。In step S214, the first station transmits at least one second PPDU with the third station using a second channel, where the second channel is a part of the first channel.

具体地,上述“第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分”可以理解为“上述第二信道是上述第一信道的部分信道”或者“上述第二信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的一部分”或者“上述第二信道对应的频域资源是上述第一信道对应的频域资源的一部分”或者“上述第二信道对应的频域范围包含于上述第一信道对应的频域范围”或者“上述第二信道是上述第一信道的子信道”等,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the above-mentioned “the second channel is a part of the above-mentioned first channel” can be understood as “the above-mentioned second channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the bandwidth of the above-mentioned second channel is a part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel are a part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned second channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the above-mentioned second channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel”, etc., and the present application does not impose any limitation on this.

其中,“上述第二信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的部分带宽”既表示上述第二信道的带宽的位置处于上述第一信道的带宽的位置内,还表示上述第二信道的带宽的大小小于上述第一信道的带宽的大小。Among them, "the bandwidth of the second channel is a partial bandwidth of the bandwidth of the first channel" means that the position of the bandwidth of the second channel is within the position of the bandwidth of the first channel, and also means that the size of the bandwidth of the second channel is smaller than the size of the bandwidth of the first channel.

示例性地,当第一站点与第二站点属于相同BSS时,该第二信道可以是上述第一站点与第二站点所属BSS的主信道。当第一站点与上述第二站点属于不同BSS并且第一站点所属BSS的次信道与第二站点所属BSS的次信道不同时,该第二信道可以是上述第一站点所属BSS的主信道、次信道、第二站点所属BSS的次信道,或者,该第二信道可以是上述第一站点所属BSS的主信道、次信道;当第一站点与上述第二站点属于不同BSS并且第一站点所属BSS的次信道与第二站点所属BSS的次信道相同时,该第二信道可以是上述第一站点所属BSS的主信道、第一站点所属BSS的次信道或第二站点所属BSS的次信道,或者,该第二信道可以是上述第一站点所属BSS的主信道。Exemplarily, when the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS, the second channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong. When the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs is different from the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, the second channel may be the primary channel, the secondary channel, or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, or the second channel may be the primary channel or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs; when the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs is the same as the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, the second channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs, the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs, or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, or the second channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs.

具体地,对于TXOP级别的占先来说,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU过程中剩余的PPDU,第一站点的传输信道从第一信道变为第二信道之后继续传输至少一个第二PPDU。或者,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点传输的新业务的PPDU。对于PPDU级别的占先来说,第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU的过程中中断了最后一个第一PPDU的传输,第一站点的传输信道从第一信道变为第二信道之后重新传输被中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输剩余的PPDU或新业务的PPDU。该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输的剩余的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU,或者,该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及新业务的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU。Specifically, for TXOP-level preemption, the at least one second PPDU may be the remaining PPDU of the first station during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station continues to transmit the at least one second PPDU after the transmission channel of the first station changes from the first channel to the second channel. Alternatively, the at least one second PPDU may be the PPDU of the new service transmitted by the first station. For PPDU-level preemption, the first station interrupts the transmission of the last first PPDU during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station retransmits the interrupted last first PPDU and continues to transmit the remaining PPDU or the PPDU of the new service after the transmission channel of the first station changes from the first channel to the second channel. The retransmitted interrupted last first PPDU and the continued transmission of the remaining PPDU may be considered as the at least one second PPDU, or the retransmitted interrupted last first PPDU and the PPDU of the new service may be considered as the at least one second PPDU.

步骤S216,上述第二站点使用上述第三信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,该第三信道是上述第一信道的一部分。Step S216: The second station transmits at least one third PPDU using the third channel, where the third channel is a part of the first channel.

类似地,上述“第三信道是第一信道的一部分”可以理解为“上述第三信道是上述第一信道的部分信道”或者“上述第三信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的一部分”或者“上述第三信道对应的频域资源是上述第一信道对应的频域资源的一部分”或者“上述第三信道对应的频域范围包含于上述第一信道对应的频域范围”或者“上述第三信道是上述第一信道的子信道”等,本申请对此不作限定。Similarly, the above-mentioned “the third channel is part of the first channel” can be understood as “the above-mentioned third channel is a partial channel of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the bandwidth of the above-mentioned third channel is part of the bandwidth of the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel are part of the frequency domain resources corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned third channel is included in the frequency domain range corresponding to the above-mentioned first channel” or “the above-mentioned third channel is a subchannel of the above-mentioned first channel”, etc., and the present application does not limit this.

类似地,“上述第三信道的带宽是上述第一信道的带宽的部分带宽”既表示上述第三信道的带宽的位置处于上述第一信道的带宽的位置内,还表示上述第三信道的带宽的大小小于上述第一信道的带宽的 大小。Similarly, “the bandwidth of the third channel is a partial bandwidth of the bandwidth of the first channel” means that the bandwidth of the third channel is within the bandwidth of the first channel and that the bandwidth of the third channel is smaller than the bandwidth of the first channel. size.

示例性地,当第一站点与第二站点属于相同BSS时,该第三信道可以是上述第一站点与第二站点所属BSS的次信道。当第一站点与上述第二站点属于不同BSS并且第一站点所属BSS的次信道与第二站点所属BSS的次信道不同时,该第三信道可以是上述第二站点所属BSS的主信道,或者,该第三信道可以是上述第二站点所属BSS的主信道、次信道;当第一站点与上述第二站点属于不同BSS并且第一站点所属BSS的次信道与第二站点所属BSS的次信道相同时,该第三信道可以是上述第二站点所属BSS的主信道,或者,该第三信道可以是上述第二站点所属BSS的主信道、第二站点所属BSS的次信道或第一站点所属BSS的次信道。Exemplarily, when the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site and the second site belong. When the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs is different from the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, the third channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, or the third channel may be the primary channel or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs; when the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs is the same as the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, the third channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, or the third channel may be the primary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, the secondary channel of the BSS to which the second site belongs, or the secondary channel of the BSS to which the first site belongs.

示例性地,上述至少一个第三PPDU的传输时延低于上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的传输时延,或者,上述至少一个第三PPDU对时延性能的要求高于上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU对时延性能的要求。例如,上述三PPDU可以是RAT,上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是非低时延的业务。或者,上述至少一个第三PPDU是其它需要及时传输的业务,本申请对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the transmission delay of the at least one third PPDU is lower than the transmission delay of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU, or the requirement of the at least one third PPDU on the delay performance is higher than the requirement of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU on the delay performance. For example, the three PPDUs may be RATs, and the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU may be non-low-latency services. Alternatively, the at least one third PPDU is other services that need to be transmitted in a timely manner, which is not limited in the present application.

通过上述业务传输方法200,当第一站点的业务传输被占先时,第一站点通过减少原业务的传输信道的方式既可以保持原业务的传输又可以预留出一部分信道供占先传输,可以降低对第一站点的原有传输的影响。Through the above-mentioned service transmission method 200, when the service transmission of the first site is preempted, the first site can maintain the transmission of the original service and reserve a part of the channel for preemptive transmission by reducing the transmission channel of the original service, thereby reducing the impact on the original transmission of the first site.

接下来以第一站点与第二站点分别属于不同BSS的第一种场景以及第一站点与第二站点属于相同BSS的第二种场景进行举例,详细介绍本申请所提供的上述业务传输的方法200。Next, the method 200 for transmitting the above-mentioned service provided in the present application is described in detail by taking a first scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and a second scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS as examples.

示例性地,第一种场景中的第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的AP 120,此时可以认为是AP 120需要向BSS2中的某个STA传输超低时延的业务数据包,AP 120想要占用AP 110与BSS1中的某个STA进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的部分信道,因此AP 120可以在BSS2的主信道上向AP 110发送占先信号;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121,此时可以认为是STA 121需要向BSS2中的AP 120传输超低时延的业务数据包,STA 121想要占用AP 110与BSS1中的某个STA进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的部分信道,因此STA 121可以在BSS2的主信道上向AP 110发送占先信号;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 111以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121,此时可以认为是STA 121需要向BSS2中的AP 120传输超低时延的业务数据包,STA 121想要占用STA 111与BSS1中的某个STA进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的部分信道,因此STA 121可以在BSS2的主信道上向STA 111发送占先信号等。本申请不作限定。下文具体以第一种场景中的第一站点为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110、第二站点为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的AP 120为例进行描述,下文图3至图6对应的是以第一种场景为例进行的描述。示例性地,在第一种场景下,上述第三站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 113,上述第四站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121。需要说明的是,上述第三站点还可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的其它STA,上述第四站点还可以是上述网络架构100的BSS2中的其它STA,本申请对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the first site in the first scenario may be AP 110 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the second site may be AP 120 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100. In this case, it can be considered that AP 120 needs to transmit an ultra-low-latency service data packet to a certain STA in BSS2, and AP 120 wants to occupy part of the channel for AP 110 and a certain STA in BSS1 to transmit non-low-latency service data packets. Therefore, AP 120 can send a preemptive signal to AP 110 on the main channel of BSS2. Alternatively, the first site may be AP 110 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the second site may be STA 121 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100. In this case, it can be considered that STA 121 needs to transmit an ultra-low-latency service data packet to AP 120 in BSS2. In the example, STA 121 wants to occupy some channels for transmitting non-low-latency service data packets between AP 110 and a certain STA in BSS1, so STA 121 can send a preemptive signal to AP 110 on the main channel of BSS2; or, the first station can be STA 111 in BSS1 of the above network architecture 100 and the second station can be STA 121 in BSS2 of the above network architecture 100. At this time, it can be considered that STA 121 needs to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets to AP 120 in BSS2, and STA 121 wants to occupy some channels for transmitting non-low-latency service data packets between STA 111 and a certain STA in BSS1, so STA 121 can send a preemptive signal to STA 111 on the main channel of BSS2, etc. This application is not limited. The following description specifically takes the first site in the first scenario as AP 110 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second site as AP 120 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100 as an example. The following Figures 3 to 6 correspond to the description based on the first scenario as an example. Exemplarily, in the first scenario, the third site may be STA 113 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the fourth site may be STA 121 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100. It should be noted that the third site may also be other STAs in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the fourth site may also be other STAs in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the present application does not limit this.

如图3所示,在发生占先前(即在接收到上述第一信息前),AP 110可以在BSS1的主信道(primary channel)、次(secondary channel)信道和BSS2的主信道、次信道上与STA 113传输至少一个第一PPDU,该至少一个PPDU中任意的两个相邻PPDU之间存在时间间隔#1。示例性地,该时间间隔#1可以为图3所示的短帧间间隔(short interframe space,SIFS),每个SIFS可以为10微妙(μs)。需要说明的是,图3仅示出了BSS1的主信道与BSS2的主信道,但是至少一个第一PPDU的传输还可以在BSS1的次信道和BSS2的次信道上传输。其中,此处的BSS1的主信道、次信道和BSS2的主信道、次信道可以是上述第一信道的示例。As shown in FIG3 , before the occurrence of the occupation (i.e., before receiving the above-mentioned first information), AP 110 may transmit at least one first PPDU to STA 113 on the primary channel (primary channel), the secondary channel (secondary channel) of BSS1 and the primary channel and the secondary channel of BSS2, and there is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent PPDUs in the at least one PPDU. Exemplarily, the time interval #1 may be the short interframe space (SIFS) shown in FIG3 , and each SIFS may be 10 microseconds (μs). It should be noted that FIG3 only shows the primary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel of BSS2, but the transmission of at least one first PPDU may also be transmitted on the secondary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS2. Among them, the primary channel and the secondary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel and the secondary channel of BSS2 here may be examples of the above-mentioned first channel.

可选地,上述时间间隔#1还可以是点协调功能帧间间隔(point coordination function interframe space,PIFS)等其它形式的帧间间隔,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the above-mentioned time interval #1 can also be other forms of inter-frame intervals such as point coordination function interframe space (PIFS), which is not limited in this application.

当AP 120有占先业务(例如,上述至少一个第三PPDU)需要传输时,为了使AP 110能够检测到第一信息,AP 110允许AP 120在上述时间间隔#1发送第一信息。相应地,AP 110在该时间间隔#1检测该第一信息,AP 110在第一时间间隔检测到该第一信息并接收该第一信息。该第一时间间隔属于上述时间间隔#1。 When AP 120 has a preemptive service (e.g., the at least one third PPDU) to transmit, in order to enable AP 110 to detect the first information, AP 110 allows AP 120 to send the first information in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information in the first time interval and receives the first information. The first time interval belongs to the time interval #1.

具体地,如图3所示,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述一个第一PPDU与上述一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔;当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与上述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔。AP 110在第一时间间隔接收到上述第一信息后使用第一信道的一部分信道(即上述第二信道)传输至少一个第二PPDU。Specifically, as shown in FIG3 , when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the at least one first PPDU and the at least one second PPDU; when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU. After receiving the first information in the first time interval, the AP 110 transmits the at least one second PPDU using a portion of the first channel (i.e., the second channel).

更进一步地,为了使AP 110能够准确检测到第一信息以及为了降低AP 120发送第一信息的资源开销,AP 110向AP 120指示在上述时间间隔#1中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔发送第一信息。相应地,AP 110在时间间隔#1中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔检测该第一信息,AP 110在第一时间间隔中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔检测到上述第一信息并接收该第一信息。其中,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于AP 110从发送状态切换为接收状态,或者,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)为AP 110从发送状态切换为接收状态的时延;该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于AP 110从接收状态切换为发送状态,或者,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)为AP 110从接收状态切换为发送状态的时延。示例性地,如图3中的“1”对应的时间可以为第二时间,以及图3中“2”对应的时间可以为第三时间。因此,AP 120在第一时间间隔中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔向AP 110发送第一信息,可以增加AP 110检测到第一信息的概率以及降低AP 120的资源开销。Furthermore, in order to enable AP 110 to accurately detect the first information and to reduce the resource overhead of AP 120 in sending the first information, AP 110 instructs AP 120 to send the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval and receives the first information. The second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, or the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state; the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, or the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state. For example, the time corresponding to "1" in FIG. 3 may be the second time, and the time corresponding to "2" in FIG. 3 may be the third time. Therefore, AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval, which can increase the probability that AP 110 detects the first information and reduce the resource overhead of AP 120.

示例性地,上述至少一个第一PPDU还可以包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息可以指示以下至少一项信息:Exemplarily, the at least one first PPDU may further include first indication information, and the first indication information may indicate at least one of the following information:

上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔等。其中,发送或接收上述第一信息的周期可以认为是占先周期(preemption period,PP),发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔可以认为是占先机会(preemption opportunity,PROP),该PP或PROP可以认为与上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期相同,如图3所示。示例性地,该第一指示信息可以包括在上述至少一个PPDU中的第一个发送的第一PPDU,本申请对此不作限定。上述时间间隔#1可以认为是此处的发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The transmission period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, the time interval of sending or receiving the first information, etc. Among them, the period of sending or receiving the first information can be considered as a preemption period (preemption period, PP), and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information can be considered as a preemption opportunity (preemption opportunity, PROP), and the PP or PROP can be considered to be the same as the transmission period of the at least one first PPDU, as shown in Figure 3. Exemplarily, the first indication information can include the first first PPDU sent in the at least one PPDU, which is not limited in this application. The time interval #1 can be considered as the time interval for sending or receiving the first information here.

可选地,上述至少一个第一PPDU中的部分或全部PPDU还可以包括发送站点(即上述第一站点)的标识(identity,ID)信息、接收站点(即上述第三站点)的ID信息、资源分配信息、调制编码方案(modulation and codingscheme,MCS)信息、空时流数(number of spatial and time,NSTS)信息等。示例性地,该信息可以包括在上述至少一个PPDU中的第一个发送的第一PPDU,该信息的内容可以作为后面发送的第一PPDU的信息内容,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, part or all of the at least one first PPDU may further include identification (ID) information of a sending site (i.e., the first site), ID information of a receiving site (i.e., the third site), resource allocation information, modulation and coding scheme (MCS) information, number of spatial and time streams (NSTS) information, etc. Exemplarily, the information may include the first PPDU sent first in the at least one PPDU, and the content of the information may be used as the information content of the first PPDU sent later, which is not limited in the present application.

当AP 110接收到来自AP 120的上述第一信息,AP 110将业务传输的信道由第一信道减少至第二信道,并使用第二信道与STA 113传输上述至少一个第二PPDU。When AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120, AP 110 reduces the channel for service transmission from the first channel to the second channel, and uses the second channel to transmit the above-mentioned at least one second PPDU with STA 113.

具体地,上述第二信道可以通过如下两种方式确定:Specifically, the second channel can be determined in the following two ways:

方式一(AP 110与AP 120对应的主信道不同):AP 110在第四信道上接收到上述第一信息,AP 110确定上述第一信道中除该第四信道之外的部分或全部信道为第二信道。Method 1 (the main channels corresponding to AP 110 and AP 120 are different): AP 110 receives the first information on the fourth channel, and AP 110 determines that part or all of the channels in the first channel except the fourth channel are the second channel.

示例性地,AP 120会在其主信道上向AP 110发送上述第一信息,AP 110所确定的第二信道包括第一信道中除AP 120的主信道之外的部分或全部信道。示例性地,如图3所示,AP 120在BSS2的主信道上发送上述第一信息,那么AP 110确定BSS1的主信道为第二信道。Exemplarily, AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 on its primary channel, and the second channel determined by AP 110 includes part or all of the first channel except the primary channel of AP 120. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG3 , AP 120 sends the first information on the primary channel of BSS2, and AP 110 determines that the primary channel of BSS1 is the second channel.

又例如,对于图4所示的更多BSS的场景,在发生占先前,AP 110在信道1、信道2、信道3、以及信道4上与STA 113传输至少一个第一PPDU,其中,信道1对应BSS1的主信道、信道3对应BSS2的主信道、信道4对应BSS3的主信道;当AP 110在BSS2的主信道上接收到来自AP 120的上述第一信息以及在BSS3的主信道上接收到来自AP 130的上述第一信息,AP 110确定信道1和信道2对应的信道为第二信道。For another example, for the scenario of more BSSs shown in Figure 4, before the occurrence of the first information, AP 110 transmits at least one first PPDU with STA 113 on channel 1, channel 2, channel 3, and channel 4, wherein channel 1 corresponds to the main channel of BSS1, channel 3 corresponds to the main channel of BSS2, and channel 4 corresponds to the main channel of BSS3; when AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120 on the main channel of BSS2 and receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 130 on the main channel of BSS3, AP 110 determines that the channel corresponding to channel 1 and channel 2 is the second channel.

AP 120发送上述第一信息的第四信道的位置和/或大小可以限制在预定范围内,避免AP 120发送上述第一信息的第四信道占用过多导致原有的传输中断的情况。例如,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的高频段部分,或者,上述第四信道处于上述第一信道的低频段部分,或者,上述第四信道的带宽小于或等于上述第一信道的带宽的一半等。The position and/or size of the fourth channel for sending the first information by AP 120 may be limited within a predetermined range to avoid the situation where the fourth channel for sending the first information by AP 120 is occupied too much and causes the original transmission to be interrupted. For example, the fourth channel is in the high frequency band of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel, etc.

需要说明的是,“AP 120在第四信道上向AP 110发送上述第一信息表明AP 120想要占用发送第一信息的第四信道进行占先传输”中的“第四信道”与“第一信息用于指示AP 120请求使用第三信道进行 占先传输”中的“第三信道”可以是相同的、部分相同的或者完全不同的,本申请对此不作限定。It should be noted that the “fourth channel” in “AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 on the fourth channel to indicate that AP 120 wants to occupy the fourth channel for sending the first information for preemptive transmission” is the same as “the first information is used to indicate that AP 120 requests to use the third channel for transmission”. The "third channel" in the "preemptive transmission" may be the same, partially the same, or completely different, and this application does not limit this.

方式二(AP 110与AP 120对应的主信道相同):上述方式一中AP 110与AP 120对应的主信道不同,该方式二是AP 110与AP 120对应的主信道相同的情况下发生的。此时,BSS1的主信道与BSS2的主信道相同。Mode 2 (AP 110 and AP 120 have the same primary channel): In Mode 1, AP 110 and AP 120 have different primary channels. Mode 2 occurs when AP 110 and AP 120 have the same primary channel. In this case, the primary channel of BSS1 is the same as the primary channel of BSS2.

如图5所示,在发生占先前,AP 110可以在信道1以及信道2上与STA 113传输至少一个第一PPDU,其中,信道1对应BSS1的主信道以及BSS2的主信道,该信道2对应BSS1的次信道和BSS2的次信道;当AP 110在信道1上接收到来自AP 120的上述第一信息,该AP 110发送第二信息,该第二信息用于指示切换AP 110的主信道以及切换之后的AP 110的主信道,上述第二信道包括切换之后的AP 110的主信道。示例性地,图5中的AP 110通过第二信息指示将其主信道切换到信道2,并在信道2或包括信道2的信道上进行至少一个第二PPDU的传输。As shown in FIG5 , before the occurrence of the occupation, AP 110 can transmit at least one first PPDU with STA 113 on channel 1 and channel 2, wherein channel 1 corresponds to the primary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel of BSS2, and channel 2 corresponds to the secondary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS2; when AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120 on channel 1, the AP 110 sends the second information, and the second information is used to indicate the switching of the primary channel of AP 110 and the primary channel of AP 110 after the switching, and the above-mentioned second channel includes the primary channel of AP 110 after the switching. Exemplarily, AP 110 in FIG5 indicates through the second information that its primary channel is switched to channel 2, and transmits at least one second PPDU on channel 2 or a channel including channel 2.

作为示例而非限定,上述第二信息可以携带在任意的无线帧中进行发送,也可以携带在上述至少一个第二PPDU中第一个发送的第二PPDU中进行发送,如图6所示。上述至少一个第二PPDU中的每个第二PPDU都包括头部的信令部分以及数据部分,该第二信息可以携带在第一个发送的第二PPDU头部的信令部分。并且该第一个发送的第二PPDU头部的信令部分在信道1和信道2上均传输,该第一个发送的第二PPDU的数据部分以及后续的第二PPDU在信道2上传输。As an example but not limitation, the second information can be carried in any wireless frame for transmission, or carried in the first second PPDU transmitted in the at least one second PPDU, as shown in FIG6 . Each second PPDU in the at least one second PPDU includes a signaling portion and a data portion of a header, and the second information can be carried in the signaling portion of the first second PPDU header. The signaling portion of the first second PPDU header is transmitted on both channel 1 and channel 2, and the data portion of the first second PPDU transmitted and subsequent second PPDUs are transmitted on channel 2.

发送站点AP 110确定第二信道之后,还需要将所确定的第二信道通知给其对应的接收站点STA 113。具体地,上述至少一个第二PPDU还可以包括第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示上述第二信道。作为示例而非限定,该第二指示信息可以携带在上述至少一个第二PPDU中第一个发送的第二PPDU中,或者该第二指示信息还可以携带在上述第二信息携带在同一个帧中进行发送。After the sending site AP 110 determines the second channel, it is also necessary to notify the corresponding receiving site STA 113 of the determined second channel. Specifically, the at least one second PPDU may also include second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel. As an example and not a limitation, the second indication information may be carried in the first second PPDU sent in the at least one second PPDU, or the second indication information may also be carried in the same frame in which the second information is carried and sent.

具体地,用于AP 120与STA 121进行至少一个第三PPDU传输的第三信道可以通过如下四种方式确定:Specifically, the third channel used for the AP 120 and the STA 121 to transmit at least one third PPDU can be determined in the following four ways:

方式一:当上述AP 110确定第二信道之后,会使用第二信道传输至少一个第二PPDU。在上述AP 110开始传输至少一个第二PPDU之后,AP 120可以监听到第一信道上的空闲信道为第三信道,并使用该第三信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,例如图3、图5、图6所示的场景。对于图4所示的更多BSS的场景,在上述AP 110确定第二信道并使用该第二信道开始传输至少一个第二PPDU之后,AP 120与AP 130可以监听到第一信道上的空闲信道为可用信道,此时AP 120和AP 130需要进行信道竞争。假如AP 120信道竞争成功,并且信道4对应BSS3的主信道,那么AP 120确定BSS2的主信道为第三信道。在上述AP 120使用第三信道开始传输至少一个第三PPDU之后,AP 130可以监听到第一信道上的空闲信道为信道4,AP 130使用信道4传输占先业务。Method 1: After the AP 110 determines the second channel, it will use the second channel to transmit at least one second PPDU. After the AP 110 starts to transmit at least one second PPDU, the AP 120 can monitor that the idle channel on the first channel is the third channel, and use the third channel to transmit at least one third PPDU, such as the scenarios shown in Figures 3, 5, and 6. For the scenario of more BSSs shown in Figure 4, after the AP 110 determines the second channel and uses the second channel to start transmitting at least one second PPDU, the AP 120 and the AP 130 can monitor that the idle channel on the first channel is an available channel. At this time, the AP 120 and the AP 130 need to compete for the channel. If the AP 120 successfully competes for the channel, and channel 4 corresponds to the main channel of BSS3, then the AP 120 determines that the main channel of BSS2 is the third channel. After the AP 120 starts to transmit at least one third PPDU using the third channel, the AP 130 can monitor that the idle channel on the first channel is channel 4, and the AP 130 uses channel 4 to transmit the preemptive service.

示例性地,上述AP 120可以基于增强型分布式信道接入(enhanced distributed channel access,EDCA)进行信道竞争,此处AP 120基于EDCA进行信道竞争的第一EDCA参数集可以与AP 120进行其它业务传输时采用的第二EDCA参数集不同。此处的其它业务可以认为是AP 120进行非占先传输时的业务。Exemplarily, the AP 120 may perform channel contention based on enhanced distributed channel access (EDCA), where a first EDCA parameter set for the AP 120 to perform channel contention based on EDCA may be different from a second EDCA parameter set used when the AP 120 performs other service transmission. The other services here may be considered as services when the AP 120 performs non-preemptive transmission.

具体地,上述第一EDCA参数集和上述第二EDCA参数集包括以下至少一项参数信息:最小竞争窗口(CWmin)、最大竞争窗口(CMmax)、TXOP门限值(TXOPlimit)等,其中,TXOPlimit表示占用信道的最长时间。EDCA参数集中的最小竞争窗口越小、最大竞争窗口越小、TXOPlimit越小,信道竞争的优先级越高,获得访问信道的机会越大。因此,AP 120基于EDCA进行信道竞争的第一EDCA参数集会采用最小竞争窗口更小、最大竞争窗口更小或者TXOPlimit更小的参数信息。Specifically, the first EDCA parameter set and the second EDCA parameter set include at least one of the following parameter information: minimum contention window (CWmin), maximum contention window (CMmax), TXOP threshold value (TXOPlimit), etc., wherein TXOPlimit indicates the longest time of occupying a channel. The smaller the minimum contention window, the smaller the maximum contention window, and the smaller the TXOPlimit in the EDCA parameter set, the higher the priority of channel contention and the greater the chance of obtaining access to the channel. Therefore, the first EDCA parameter set for AP 120 to perform channel contention based on EDCA will adopt parameter information with a smaller minimum contention window, a smaller maximum contention window, or a smaller TXOPlimit.

方式二:AP 110发送的上述至少一个第一PPDU中的部分或全部第一PPDU包括第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示上述第三信道。或者,该第三指示信息携带在AP 110发送的其它无线帧(例如信标帧、探测响应帧等)中。AP 120可以监听到AP 110发送的至少一个第一PPDU、其它无线帧等。Mode 2: Part or all of the at least one first PPDU sent by AP 110 includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the third channel. Alternatively, the third indication information is carried in other wireless frames (such as beacon frames, probe response frames, etc.) sent by AP 110. AP 120 can monitor at least one first PPDU, other wireless frames, etc. sent by AP 110.

示例性地,上述第三指示信息包括一个比特,该一个比特的值为1指示AP 110允许AP 120在第一信道的部分信道上传输至少一个第三PPDU。更进一步地,上述第三指示信息还包括N个比特,该N个比特指示上述第三信道的位置和大小。例如,N个比特可以组成一个比特位图,该N个比特中的每个比特代表一个20MHZ的带宽,比特位图[0110]指示80MHZ带宽的中间40MHZ带宽对应的信道为第三信道。或者,N个比特可以组成一个比特位图[0101],指示80MHZ带宽的第二个20MHZ带宽对应的信道和第四个20MHZ带宽对应的信道为第三信道。Exemplarily, the third indication information includes one bit, the value of which is 1, indicating that AP 110 allows AP 120 to transmit at least one third PPDU on a portion of the first channel. Furthermore, the third indication information also includes N bits, which indicate the position and size of the third channel. For example, the N bits may form a bitmap, each of which represents a 20 MHZ bandwidth, and the bitmap [0110] indicates that the channel corresponding to the middle 40 MHZ bandwidth of the 80 MHZ bandwidth is the third channel. Alternatively, the N bits may form a bitmap [0101], indicating that the channel corresponding to the second 20 MHZ bandwidth of the 80 MHZ bandwidth and the channel corresponding to the fourth 20 MHZ bandwidth are the third channel.

方式三:上述第三信道可以根据AP 110的工作信道(即上述第一信道)确定,具体如何由AP 110的工作信道确定可以是预定义的。 Mode 3: The third channel may be determined according to the working channel of the AP 110 (ie, the first channel). Specifically, how the third channel is determined by the working channel of the AP 110 may be predefined.

示例性地,AP 110工作信道的带宽为320MHZ,第三信道可以为AP 110工作信道的次信道(secondary channel),第三信道的带宽可以为160MHZ;或者,AP 110的工作信道的带宽为160MHZ,第三信道可以为AP 110的工作信道的次信道,第三信道的带宽可以为80MHZ;AP 110的工作信道的带宽为80MHZ,第三信道可以为AP 110的工作信道的次信道,第三信道的带宽可以为40MHZ;AP 110的工作信道的带宽为40MHZ,第三信道可以为AP 110的工作信道的次信道,第三信道的带宽可以为20MHZ。Exemplarily, the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 320MHZ, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 160MHZ; or, the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 160MHZ, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 80MHZ; the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 80MHZ, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 40MHZ; the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 40MHZ, the third channel may be a secondary channel of the working channel of AP 110, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 20MHZ.

或者,AP 110的工作信道的带宽为320MHZ,第三信道的带宽可以为AP 110的工作信道中处于高频段的160MHZ,或者,第三信道的带宽可以为AP 110的工作信道中处于低频段的160MHZ,或者,第三信道的带宽的大小不超过160MHZ、第三带宽的位置不限定。Alternatively, the bandwidth of the working channel of AP 110 is 320MHZ, and the bandwidth of the third channel may be 160MHZ in the high frequency band of the working channel of AP 110. Alternatively, the bandwidth of the third channel may be 160MHZ in the low frequency band of the working channel of AP 110. Alternatively, the bandwidth of the third channel does not exceed 160MHZ and the position of the third bandwidth is not limited.

方式四:上述第三信道可以是AP 110与AP 120提前通过信令交互协商好的。Method 4: The third channel mentioned above can be negotiated in advance by AP 110 and AP 120 through signaling interaction.

示例性地,AP 110与AP 120之间建立占先协议。AP 110向AP 120发送第四信息,该第四信息用于指示上述第三信道的配置信息。其中,第三信道的配置信息包括第三信道的带宽位置和带宽大小等信息。可选地,AP 120向AP 110发送第三信息,该第三信息用于请求第三信道的配置信息。Exemplarily, a preemptive protocol is established between AP 110 and AP 120. AP 110 sends fourth information to AP 120, where the fourth information is used to indicate the configuration information of the third channel. The configuration information of the third channel includes information such as the bandwidth position and bandwidth size of the third channel. Optionally, AP 120 sends third information to AP 110, where the third information is used to request the configuration information of the third channel.

上述方式四的协商过程在AP 120进行占先传输前完成即可。The negotiation process of method 4 above can be completed before AP 120 performs preemptive transmission.

上述第一种场景的第一站点与第二站点分别属于不同的BSS,下述第二种场景的第一站点与第二站点属于相同BSS,示例性地,下述第二种场景以BSS1中的STA 111为第一站点、BSS1中的STA 112为第二站点为例进行描述。此时,第二种场景对应的上述第三站点与上述第四站点均为BSS1中的上述AP 110。此时可以认为是BSS1中的STA 112需要向BSS1中的AP 110传输超低时延的业务数据包,STA 112想要占用STA 111与BSS1中的AP 110进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的部分信道,因此STA 112可以向STA 111发送占先信号。The first station and the second station in the above-mentioned first scenario belong to different BSSs respectively, and the first station and the second station in the following second scenario belong to the same BSS. For example, the following second scenario is described by taking STA 111 in BSS1 as the first station and STA 112 in BSS1 as the second station. At this time, the above-mentioned third station and the above-mentioned fourth station corresponding to the second scenario are both the above-mentioned AP 110 in BSS1. At this time, it can be considered that STA 112 in BSS1 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 110 in BSS1, and STA 112 wants to occupy part of the channel for STA 111 and AP 110 in BSS1 to transmit non-low latency service data packets, so STA 112 can send a preemptive signal to STA 111.

如图7所示,业务传输方法200的第二种场景在发生占先前,STA 111与AP 110在BSS1的主信道与BSS1的次信道(或者,非主信道)上传输至少一个第一PPDU,该BSS1的主信道与BSS1的次信道可以为上述第一信道的一例;在发生占先后,STA 111与AP 110在BSS1的主信道上传输至少一个第二PPDU,该BSS1的主信道可以为上述第二信道的一例;STA 112与AP 110在BSS1的次信道(或者,非主信道)上传输至少一个第三PPDU,该BSS1的次信道可以为上述第三信道的一例。As shown in FIG7 , in the second scenario of the service transmission method 200 , before the occurrence of occupation, STA 111 and AP 110 transmit at least one first PPDU on the main channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS1 (or non-main channel), and the main channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS1 may be an example of the above-mentioned first channel; before the occurrence of occupation, STA 111 and AP 110 transmit at least one second PPDU on the main channel of BSS1, and the main channel of BSS1 may be an example of the above-mentioned second channel; STA 112 and AP 110 transmit at least one third PPDU on the secondary channel of BSS1 (or non-main channel), and the secondary channel of BSS1 may be an example of the above-mentioned third channel.

第二种场景的其他内容可以参照上述第一种场景的内容,此处不再赘述。The rest of the second scenario can refer to the first scenario mentioned above and will not be repeated here.

当存在占先传输时,本申请实施例所提供的上述业务传输的方法200可以通过减少原先传输的信道来保持原先传输不中断,降低对原先传输的影响。When there is a preemptive transmission, the above-mentioned service transmission method 200 provided in the embodiment of the present application can keep the original transmission uninterrupted by reducing the channel of the original transmission, thereby reducing the impact on the original transmission.

上述业务传输的方法200是其它站点对发送站点的占先,本申请还可以提供另一种业务传输的方法300,可以降低发送站点自身的占先对发送站点的原有传输的影响。图8所示的该业务传输的方法300中的发送站点在检测到发送站点新到达的缓存数据包中有超低时延要求的业务数据包,发送站点减少原先传输的信道,并预留一部分信道供发送站点的超低时延要求的业务数据包的传输。该业务传输的方法300与上述业务传输的方法200的主要区别在于:无需执行上述步骤S212并且上述至少一个第一PPDU、上述至少一个第二PPDU以及上述至少一个第三PPDU都是由发送站点进行传输。The above-mentioned service transmission method 200 is the preemption of other sites on the sending site. The present application can also provide another service transmission method 300, which can reduce the impact of the sending site's own preemption on the original transmission of the sending site. When the sending site in the service transmission method 300 shown in Figure 8 detects that there is a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements in the newly arrived cached data packet of the sending site, the sending site reduces the original transmission channel and reserves a part of the channel for the transmission of the service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements of the sending site. The main difference between the service transmission method 300 and the above-mentioned service transmission method 200 is that: there is no need to perform the above-mentioned step S212 and the above-mentioned at least one first PPDU, the above-mentioned at least one second PPDU and the above-mentioned at least one third PPDU are all transmitted by the sending site.

图8是本申请实施例的业务传输方法300的示意性流程图。该业务传输的方法300包括:FIG8 is a schematic flow chart of a service transmission method 300 according to an embodiment of the present application. The service transmission method 300 includes:

步骤S310,第一站点使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU。In step S310 , the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using the first channel.

步骤S312,当第一站点检测新到达的缓存数据包中有超低时延要求的业务数据包,第一站点使用第二信道与第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,并使用第三信道传输至少一个第三PPDU。Step S312, when the first site detects that there is a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirement in the newly arrived cached data packet, the first site uses the second channel to transmit at least one second PPDU with the third site, and uses the third channel to transmit at least one third PPDU.

具体地,上述第二信道是上述第一信道的一部分,以及上述第三信道是上述第一信道的一部分。并且上述第二信道与上述第三信道之和小于或等于上述第一信道。Specifically, the second channel is a part of the first channel, and the third channel is a part of the first channel, and the sum of the second channel and the third channel is less than or equal to the first channel.

示例性地,上述至少一个第三PPDU可以是第一站点与第四站点传输的超低时延要求的业务数据包,该业务传输方法300中的第四站点可以是该业务传输方法300中的第三站点,或者,该第四站点可以是可以与第一站点进行数据交互的其它站点,本申请对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the at least one third PPDU may be a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements transmitted between the first site and the fourth site, and the fourth site in the service transmission method 300 may be the third site in the service transmission method 300, or the fourth site may be other sites that can interact with the first site for data, and the present application does not limit this.

具体地,对于TXOP级别的占先来说,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU过程中剩余的PPDU,第一站点的传输信道从第一信道变为第二信道之后继续传输至少一个第二PPDU。或者,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点传输的新业务的PPDU。对于PPDU级别的占先来说,第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU的过程中中断了最后一个第一PPDU的传输,第一站点的传输信道从第一信道变为第二信道之后重新传输被中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输剩余的PPDU 或新业务的PPDU。该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输的剩余的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU,或者,该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及新业务的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU。Specifically, for TXOP-level preemption, the at least one second PPDU may be the PPDU remaining in the process of transmitting at least one first PPDU by the first station, and the first station continues to transmit the at least one second PPDU after the transmission channel of the first station changes from the first channel to the second channel. Alternatively, the at least one second PPDU may be the PPDU of a new service transmitted by the first station. For PPDU-level preemption, the first station interrupts the transmission of the last first PPDU in the process of transmitting at least one first PPDU, and the first station retransmits the interrupted last first PPDU and continues to transmit the remaining PPDUs after the transmission channel of the first station changes from the first channel to the second channel. Or a PPDU of a new service. The last first PPDU of the interruption that is retransmitted and the remaining PPDUs that continue to be transmitted can be considered as the at least one second PPDU mentioned above, or the last first PPDU of the interruption that is retransmitted and the PPDU of the new service can be considered as the at least one second PPDU mentioned above.

通过上述业务传输方法300,当第一站点有超低时延的业务需要传输时,无需等待当前的业务传输完成才可以进行传输,可以立即执行超低时延的业务数据包的传输,提升业务体验。Through the above-mentioned service transmission method 300, when the first site has an ultra-low latency service to be transmitted, there is no need to wait for the current service transmission to be completed before transmission can be performed. The transmission of the ultra-low latency service data packet can be executed immediately, thereby improving the service experience.

本申请实施例所提供的上述业务传输方法200和上述业务传输方法300是通过减少原先传输的信道来降低对原先传输的影响以及确保占先传输的正常进行,本申请实施例还可以提供另一种业务传输的方法800,该业务传输方法800中的发送站点在检测到其它站点的占先信号后仍然使用原先的信道进行原先业务的传输,并且允许占先站点也使用该信道进行占先业务的传输,但是发送站点需要降低原先业务传输的功率或MCS,从而降低对占先传输的影;或者,占先站点需要降低占先业务传输的功率或MCS,从而降低对原先业务的影响。The above-mentioned service transmission method 200 and the above-mentioned service transmission method 300 provided in the embodiments of the present application reduce the impact on the original transmission and ensure the normal progress of the preemptive transmission by reducing the channel of the original transmission. The embodiments of the present application can also provide another service transmission method 800. The sending site in the service transmission method 800 still uses the original channel to transmit the original service after detecting the preemptive signal of other sites, and allows the preemptive site to also use the channel to transmit the preemptive service, but the sending site needs to reduce the power or MCS of the original service transmission to reduce the impact on the preemptive transmission; or, the preemptive site needs to reduce the power or MCS of the preemptive service transmission to reduce the impact on the original service.

示例性地,下述业务传输方法800中的第一站点(即发送站点)可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点(即其它站点)可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的AP 120;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 111以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 111以及上述第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 112等,本申请对第一站点与第二站点的具体形态不作限定。可以看出,第一站点与第二站点可以属于相同BSS,也可以属于不同BSS。Exemplarily, the first station (i.e., the sending station) in the following service transmission method 800 may be the AP 110 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station (i.e., the other station) may be the AP 120 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100; or, the first station may be the AP 110 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station may be the STA 121 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100; or, the first station may be the STA 111 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station may be the STA 121 in the BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100; or, the first station may be the STA 111 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, and the second station may be the STA 112 in the BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100, etc., and the present application does not limit the specific forms of the first station and the second station. It can be seen that the first station and the second station may belong to the same BSS or to different BSSs.

图9是本申请实施例的业务传输方法800的示意性流程图。需要说明的是,图9中以第一站点和第二站点作为该交互性示意的执行主体来示意该方法,但本申请并不限制该交互示意的执行主体。示例性地,图9中的第一站点和第二站点也可以是支持其实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统或处理器等,还可以是实现全部或部分其功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件。具体地,该业务传输方法800包括:FIG9 is a schematic flow chart of a service transmission method 800 of an embodiment of the present application. It should be noted that FIG9 uses the first site and the second site as the execution subjects of the interactive schematic to illustrate the method, but the present application does not limit the execution subjects of the interactive schematic. Exemplarily, the first site and the second site in FIG9 may also be chips, chip systems or processors that support the implementation of the method, or may be logical nodes, logical modules or software that implement all or part of its functions. Specifically, the service transmission method 800 includes:

步骤S810,第一站点基于第一参数使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU。In step S810 , the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using a first channel based on a first parameter.

具体地,上述第一信道的带宽可以是20MHz、40MHz、80MHz、160MHz、320MHz、640MHz等任意带宽,本申请对此不作限定。Specifically, the bandwidth of the first channel may be any bandwidth such as 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 320 MHz, 640 MHz, etc., and this application does not limit this.

步骤S812,第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,该第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输。相应地,第一站点接收该第一信息。Step S812: The second site sends first information to the first site, where the first information is used to indicate that the second site requests service transmission. Correspondingly, the first site receives the first information.

示例性地,上述第一信息可以是占先信号,该占先信号可以是STF,或者,该占先信号可以是STF+LTF,或者,该占先信号可以是STF+LTF+SIG。Exemplarily, the first information may be a preemptive signal, and the preemptive signal may be STF, or the preemptive signal may be STF+LTF, or the preemptive signal may be STF+LTF+SIG.

可选地,上述第一信息还用于指示第二站点请求使用上述第一信道。示例性地,上述第二站点可以请求使用上述第一信道与第四站点传输至少一个第三PPDU。Optionally, the first information is further used to indicate that the second station requests to use the first channel. Exemplarily, the second station may request to use the first channel to transmit at least one third PPDU with the fourth station.

步骤S814,第一站点基于第二参数使用上述第一信道与上述第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU。Step S814: The first station transmits at least one second PPDU with the third station using the first channel based on the second parameter.

具体地,上述第一参数包括第一站点传输上述至少一个第一PPDU的功率或第一站点传输上述至少一个第一PPDU的MCS,上述第二参数包括第一站点传输上述至少一个第二PPDU的功率或第一站点传输上述至少一个第二PPDU的MCS。其中,该第二参数所表示的功率低于第一参数所表示的功率,或者,该第二参数所表示的MCS低于第一参数所表示的MCS。Specifically, the first parameter includes the power of the first site transmitting the at least one first PPDU or the MCS of the first site transmitting the at least one first PPDU, and the second parameter includes the power of the first site transmitting the at least one second PPDU or the MCS of the first site transmitting the at least one second PPDU. The power represented by the second parameter is lower than the power represented by the first parameter, or the MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter.

其中,上述MCS包括编码率(code rate)和/或调制阶数(modulation order),上述第二参数所表示的MCS低于第一参数所表示的MCS包括:上述第二参数所表示的编码率低于第一参数所表示的编码率和/或上述第二参数所表示的调制阶数低于第一参数所表示的调制阶数。The MCS includes a coding rate and/or a modulation order, and the MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter, including: the coding rate represented by the second parameter is lower than the coding rate represented by the first parameter and/or the modulation order represented by the second parameter is lower than the modulation order represented by the first parameter.

调制(modulation)可以定义单个资源元素(resource element,RE)承载多少比特位。当前的5G NR支持QPSK、16-QAM、64-QAM、256-QAM等调制方式。使用QPSK调制方式,每个RE可以承载2个比特位;使用16-QAM调制方式,每个RE可以承载4个比特位;使用64-QAM调制方式,每个RE可以承载6个比特位;使用256-QAM调制方式,每个RE可以承载8个比特位等。这里所示的16、64、256等就是调制阶数(modulation order)。Modulation can define how many bits a single resource element (RE) carries. The current 5G NR supports modulation methods such as QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM, and 256-QAM. With QPSK modulation, each RE can carry 2 bits; with 16-QAM modulation, each RE can carry 4 bits; with 64-QAM modulation, each RE can carry 6 bits; with 256-QAM modulation, each RE can carry 8 bits, etc. The 16, 64, 256, etc. shown here are the modulation orders.

编码率(code rate)可以定义有用比特位与总传输比特位之间的比率。The code rate defines the ratio of useful bits to the total transmitted bits.

示例性地,不同的MCS索引(MCS index)对应不同的编码率(code rate)和/或调制阶数(modulation order),如下表1所示。 Exemplarily, different MCS indices (MCS index) correspond to different coding rates (code rate) and/or modulation orders (modulation order), as shown in Table 1 below.

表1
Table 1

示例性地,当第一站点采用调制阶数为调制方式1024-QAM对应的1024在第一信道传输至少一个第一PPDU时,在接收到第一信息后,第一站点采用调制阶数可以为调制方式256-QAM对应的256在第一信道传输至少一个第二PPDU;或者,当第一站点采用编码率为调制方式256-QAM对应的5/6在第一信道传输至少一个第一PPDU时,在接收到第一信息后,第一站点采用编码率可以为调制方式256-QAM对应的3/4在第一信道传输至少一个第二PPDU,本申请对此不作限定。Exemplarily, when the first site uses a modulation order of 1024 corresponding to the modulation mode 1024-QAM to transmit at least one first PPDU on the first channel, after receiving the first information, the first site uses a modulation order of 256 corresponding to the modulation mode 256-QAM to transmit at least one second PPDU on the first channel; or, when the first site uses a coding rate of 5/6 corresponding to the modulation mode 256-QAM to transmit at least one first PPDU on the first channel, after receiving the first information, the first site uses a coding rate of 3/4 corresponding to the modulation mode 256-QAM to transmit at least one second PPDU on the first channel. The present application does not limit this.

可选地,上述第一站点传输上述至少一个第二PPDU的功率可以低于第一站点的最大发送功率,或者,上述第一站点传输上述至少一个第二PPDU的MCS可以低于第一站点的最高MCS。Optionally, the power with which the first site transmits the at least one second PPDU may be lower than the maximum transmission power of the first site, or the MCS with which the first site transmits the at least one second PPDU may be lower than the highest MCS of the first site.

具体地,对于TXOP级别的占先来说,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU过程中剩余的PPDU,第一站点在接收到第一信息后使用第一信道继续传输至少一个第二PPDU。或者,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点在接收到第一信息后使用第一信道传输的新业务的PPDU。对于PPDU级别的占先来说,第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU的过程中中断了最后一个第一PPDU的传输,第一站点在接收到第一信息后使用第一信道重新传输被中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输剩余的PPDU或新业务的PPDU。该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输的剩余的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU,或者,该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及新业务的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU。Specifically, for TXOP-level preemption, the at least one second PPDU may be the remaining PPDU of the first station during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station continues to transmit the at least one second PPDU using the first channel after receiving the first information. Alternatively, the at least one second PPDU may be the PPDU of a new service transmitted by the first station using the first channel after receiving the first information. For PPDU-level preemption, the first station interrupts the transmission of the last first PPDU during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station retransmits the interrupted last first PPDU and continues to transmit the remaining PPDU or the PPDU of the new service using the first channel after receiving the first information. The retransmitted interrupted last first PPDU and the continued transmission of the remaining PPDU may be considered as the at least one second PPDU, or the retransmitted interrupted last first PPDU and the PPDU of the new service may be considered as the at least one second PPDU.

可选地,步骤S816,上述第一站点向第二站点指示第三参数,该第三参数包括第二站点传输至少一个第三PPDU的第一功率或第二站点传输至少一个第三PPDU的第一MCS。Optionally, in step S816, the first site indicates a third parameter to the second site, where the third parameter includes a first power for the second site to transmit at least one third PPDU or a first MCS for the second site to transmit at least one third PPDU.

具体地,上述第三参数可以通过以下三种方式确定:Specifically, the third parameter can be determined in the following three ways:

方式一:第一站点发送的上述至少一个第一PPDU中的部分或全部第一PPDU包括第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示上述第三参数。或者,该第四指示信息携带在第一站点发送的其它无线帧(例如信标帧、探测响应帧等)中。第二站点可以监听到第一站点发送的至少一个第一PPDU、其它无线帧等。Mode 1: Some or all of the at least one first PPDU sent by the first station include fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the third parameter. Alternatively, the fourth indication information is carried in other wireless frames (such as beacon frames, probe response frames, etc.) sent by the first station. The second station can monitor at least one first PPDU, other wireless frames, etc. sent by the first station.

方式二:上述第三参数可以是预定义的。Method 2: The third parameter may be predefined.

示例性地,可以提前预定义第三参数所包括的第一功率或第一MCS。Exemplarily, the first power or the first MCS included in the third parameter may be predefined in advance.

方式三:上述第三参数可以是第一站点与第二站点提前通过信令交互协商好的。Method three: the third parameter may be negotiated in advance between the first site and the second site through signaling interaction.

示例性地,第一站点与第二站点之间建立占先协议。第一站点向第二站点发送第五信息,该第五信息用于指示上述第三参数。Exemplarily, a preemptive protocol is established between the first station and the second station. The first station sends fifth information to the second station, where the fifth information is used to indicate the third parameter.

可选地,第二站点向第一站点发送第六信息,该第六信息用于请求第三参数。Optionally, the second site sends sixth information to the first site, where the sixth information is used to request a third parameter.

上述方式三的协商过程在第二站点进行占先传输前完成即可。The negotiation process of the above-mentioned method 3 can be completed before the second station performs preemptive transmission.

步骤S816,上述第二站点基于第三参数使用上述第一信道传输至少一个第三PPDU。 Step S816: The second station transmits at least one third PPDU using the first channel based on the third parameter.

示例性地,上述第二站点基于上述第一功率使用第一信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,或者,上述第二站点基于第一MCS传输至少一个第三PPDU。Exemplarily, the second site transmits at least one third PPDU using the first channel based on the first power, or the second site transmits at least one third PPDU based on the first MCS.

或者,上述步骤S816可以不执行,此时上述第二站点以低于第二站点的最大发送功率的功率传输至少一个第三PPDU,或者,上述第二站点以低于第二站点的最高MCS的MCS传输至少一个第三PPDU。Alternatively, the above-mentioned step S816 may not be performed, in which case the above-mentioned second site transmits at least one third PPDU with a power lower than the maximum transmission power of the second site, or the above-mentioned second site transmits at least one third PPDU with an MCS lower than the highest MCS of the second site.

具体地,上述第二站点的最大发送功率与上述第二站点的最高MCS可以通过以下三种方式确定:Specifically, the maximum transmit power of the second site and the highest MCS of the second site may be determined in the following three ways:

方式一:第一站点发送的上述至少一个第一PPDU中的部分或全部第一PPDU包括第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示第二站点的最大发送功率或上述第二站点的最高MCS。或者,该第五指示信息携带在第一站点发送的其它无线帧(例如信标帧、探测响应帧等)中。第二站点可以监听到第一站点发送的至少一个第一PPDU、其它无线帧等。Mode 1: Some or all of the at least one first PPDU sent by the first station include fifth indication information, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate the maximum transmission power of the second station or the highest MCS of the second station. Alternatively, the fifth indication information is carried in other radio frames (such as beacon frames, detection response frames, etc.) sent by the first station. The second station can monitor at least one first PPDU, other radio frames, etc. sent by the first station.

方式二:上述第二站点的最大发送功率或上述第二站点的最高MCS可以是预定义的。Method 2: The maximum transmission power of the second site or the highest MCS of the second site may be predefined.

示例性地,可以提前预定义第二站点的最大发送功率或上述第二站点的最高MCS。Exemplarily, the maximum transmission power of the second site or the highest MCS of the second site may be predefined in advance.

方式三:上述第二站点的最大发送功率或上述第二站点的最高MCS可以是第一站点与第二站点提前通过信令交互协商好的。Method three: the maximum transmission power of the second site or the highest MCS of the second site may be negotiated in advance between the first site and the second site through signaling interaction.

示例性地,第一站点与第二站点之间建立占先协议。第一站点向第二站点发送第七信息,该第七信息用于指示上述第二站点的最大发送功率或上述第二站点的最高MCS。Exemplarily, a preemptive protocol is established between the first station and the second station. The first station sends seventh information to the second station, where the seventh information is used to indicate the maximum transmit power of the second station or the highest MCS of the second station.

可选地,第二站点向第一站点发送第八信息,该第八信息用于请求第二站点的最大发送功率或上述第二站点的最高MCS。Optionally, the second site sends eighth information to the first site, where the eighth information is used to request a maximum transmission power of the second site or a highest MCS of the second site.

上述方式三的协商过程在第二站点进行占先传输前完成即可。The negotiation process of the above-mentioned method 3 can be completed before the second station performs preemptive transmission.

示例性地,上述至少一个第三PPDU的传输时延低于上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU的传输时延。例如,上述至少一个第三PPDU可以是RAT,上述至少一个第一PPDU或上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是非低时延的业务,或者,上述至少一个第三PPDU是其它需要及时传输的业务,本申请对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the transmission delay of the at least one third PPDU is lower than the transmission delay of the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU. For example, the at least one third PPDU may be a RAT, the at least one first PPDU or the at least one second PPDU may be a non-low-latency service, or the at least one third PPDU may be other services that need to be transmitted in a timely manner, which is not limited in this application.

通过上述业务传输方法800,当第一站点的业务传输被占先时,第一站点通过降低原业务的传输参数或降低占先业务的传输参数的方式既可以保持原业务的传输又可以降低对占先业务传输的影响,可以降低对第一站点的原有传输的影响,又可以降低对占先业务的影响。Through the above-mentioned service transmission method 800, when the service transmission of the first site is preempted, the first site can maintain the transmission of the original service and reduce the impact on the preempted service transmission by reducing the transmission parameters of the original service or reducing the transmission parameters of the preempted service. It can reduce the impact on the original transmission of the first site and reduce the impact on the preempted service.

接下来分别以第一站点与第二站点分别属于不同BSS的第一种场景以及第一站点与第二站点属于相同BSS的第二种场景进行举例,详细介绍本申请所提供的上述业务传输的方法800。Next, the method 800 for transmitting the above-mentioned service provided in the present application is described in detail by taking a first scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to different BSSs and a second scenario in which the first site and the second site belong to the same BSS as examples.

第一种场景中的第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的AP 120,此时可以认为是AP 120需要向BSS2中的某个STA传输超低时延的业务数据包,AP 120想要占用AP 110与BSS1中的某个STA进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的信道;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121,此时可以认为是STA 121需要向BSS2中的AP 120传输超低时延的业务数据包,STA 121想要占用AP 110与BSS1中的某个STA进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的信道;或者,第一站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 111以及第二站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121,此时可以认为是STA 121需要向BSS2中的AP 120传输超低时延的业务数据包,STA 121想要占用STA 111与BSS1中的某个STA进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的信道等。本申请不作限定。下文具体以第一种场景中的第一站点为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的AP 110、第二站点为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的AP 120为例进行描述,下文图10对应的是以业务传输方法800的第一种场景为例进行的描述。示例性地,在第一种场景下,上述第三站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的STA 113,上述第四站点可以为上述网络架构100的BSS2中的STA 121。需要说明的是,上述第三站点还可以为上述网络架构100的BSS1中的其它STA,上述第四站点还可以是上述网络架构100的BSS2中的其它STA,本申请对此不作限定。In the first scenario, the first station may be AP 110 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the second station may be AP 120 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100. In this case, it can be considered that AP 120 needs to transmit ultra-low-latency service data packets to a certain STA in BSS2, and AP 120 wants to occupy the channel for AP 110 and a certain STA in BSS1 to transmit non-low-latency service data packets. Alternatively, the first station may be AP 110 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the second station may be STA 121 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100. In this case, it can be considered that STA 121 1 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 120 in BSS2, and STA 121 wants to occupy the channel for non-low latency service data packets transmitted between AP 110 and a certain STA in BSS1; or, the first station can be STA 111 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100 and the second station can be STA 121 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100. At this time, it can be considered that STA 121 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 120 in BSS2, and STA 121 wants to occupy the channel for non-low latency service data packets transmitted between STA 111 and a certain STA in BSS1, etc. This application is not limited. The following specifically describes the first scenario in which the first station is AP 110 in BSS1 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100 and the second station is AP 120 in BSS2 of the above-mentioned network architecture 100. Figure 10 below corresponds to the description of the first scenario of the service transmission method 800 as an example. Exemplarily, in the first scenario, the third station may be STA 113 in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the fourth station may be STA 121 in BSS2 of the network architecture 100. It should be noted that the third station may also be other STAs in BSS1 of the network architecture 100, and the fourth station may also be other STAs in BSS2 of the network architecture 100, which is not limited in the present application.

如图10所示,在发生占先前(即在接收到上述第一信息前),AP 110可以在BSS1的主信道、BSS1的次信道和BSS2的主信道、BSS2的次信道上与STA 113传输至少一个第一PPDU,该至少一个PPDU中任意的两个相邻PPDU之间存在时间间隔#1。示例性地,该时间间隔#1可以为图10所示的SIFS,每个SIFS可以为10微妙(μs)。其中,图10所示的BSS1的主信道、BSS1的次信道和BSS2的主信道、BSS2的次信道可以是上述第一信道的一例。需要说明的是,图10仅示出了BSS1的主信道与BSS2的主信道,但是至少一个第一PPDU的传输还可以在BSS1的次信道和BSS2的次信道上传输。 As shown in FIG10, before the occurrence of the occupation (i.e., before receiving the above-mentioned first information), AP 110 may transmit at least one first PPDU with STA 113 on the primary channel of BSS1, the secondary channel of BSS1, the primary channel of BSS2, and the secondary channel of BSS2, and there is a time interval #1 between any two adjacent PPDUs in the at least one PPDU. Exemplarily, the time interval #1 may be the SIFS shown in FIG10, and each SIFS may be 10 microseconds (μs). Among them, the primary channel of BSS1, the secondary channel of BSS1, the primary channel of BSS2, and the secondary channel of BSS2 shown in FIG10 may be an example of the above-mentioned first channel. It should be noted that FIG10 only shows the primary channel of BSS1 and the primary channel of BSS2, but the transmission of at least one first PPDU may also be transmitted on the secondary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS2.

可选地,上述时间间隔#1还可以是PIFS等其它形式的帧间间隔,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, the time interval #1 may also be other forms of inter-frame intervals such as PIFS, which is not limited in the present application.

当AP 120有占先业务(例如,上述至少一个第三PPDU)需要传输时,为了使AP 110能够检测到第一信息,AP 110允许AP 120在上述时间间隔#1发送第一信息。相应地,AP 110在时间间隔#1检测该第一信息,AP 110在第一时间间隔检测到该第一信息并接收该第一信息。When AP 120 has a preemptive service (e.g., the at least one third PPDU) to transmit, in order to enable AP 110 to detect the first information, AP 110 allows AP 120 to send the first information in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information in the first time interval and receives the first information.

具体地,如图10所示,当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述一个第一PPDU与上述一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔;当上述至少一个第一PPDU的数量或上述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,上述第一时间间隔是上述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与上述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔。AP 110在第一时间间隔接收到上述第一信息后基于上述第二参数使用第一信道传输至少一个第二PPDU。Specifically, as shown in FIG10 , when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the at least one first PPDU and the at least one second PPDU; when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the number of the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU. After receiving the first information at the first time interval, the AP 110 transmits the at least one second PPDU using the first channel based on the second parameter.

更进一步地,为了使AP 110能够准确检测到第一信息以及为了降低AP 120发送第一信息的资源开销,AP 110向AP 120指示在上述时间间隔#1中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔发送第一信息。相应地,AP 110在时间间隔#1中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔检测该第一信息,AP 110在第一时间窗中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔检测到上述第一信息并接收该第一信息。其中,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)用于AP 110从发送状态切换为接收状态,或者,该第二时间(aTxRxTurnaroundTime)为AP 110从发送状态切换为接收状态的时延;该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)用于AP 110从接收状态切换为发送状态,或者,该第三时间(aRxTxTurnaroundTime)为AP 110从接收状态切换为发送状态的时延。示例性地,图10中的“1”对应的时间可以为第二时间,以及图9中“2”对应的时间可以为第三时间。因此,AP 120在第一时间间隔中除第二时间和/或第三时间之外的时间间隔向AP 110发送第一信息,可以增加AP 110检测到第一信息的概率以及降低AP 120的资源开销。Furthermore, in order to enable AP 110 to accurately detect the first information and to reduce the resource overhead of AP 120 in sending the first information, AP 110 instructs AP 120 to send the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1. Accordingly, AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the time interval #1, and AP 110 detects the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time window and receives the first information. The second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, or the second time (aTxRxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a sending state to a receiving state; the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is used for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, or the third time (aRxTxTurnaroundTime) is a delay for AP 110 to switch from a receiving state to a sending state. Exemplarily, the time corresponding to "1" in FIG. 10 may be the second time, and the time corresponding to "2" in FIG. 9 may be the third time. Therefore, AP 120 sends the first information to AP 110 at a time interval other than the second time and/or the third time in the first time interval, which can increase the probability that AP 110 detects the first information and reduce the resource overhead of AP 120.

示例性地,上述至少一个第一PPDU还可以包括第一指示信息,该第一指示信息可以指示以下至少一项信息:Exemplarily, the at least one first PPDU may further include first indication information, and the first indication information may indicate at least one of the following information:

至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收上述第一信息的周期、发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔等。其中,发送或接收上述第一信息的周期可以认为是PP,发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔可以认为是PROP,该PP或PROP可以认为与上述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期相同,如图9所示。示例性地,该第一指示信息可以包括在上述至少一个PPDU中的第一个发送的第一PPDU,本申请对此不作限定。上述时间间隔#1可以认为是此处的发送或接收上述第一信息的时间间隔。The transmission period of at least one first PPDU, the length of at least one first PPDU, the period for sending or receiving the above-mentioned first information, the time interval for sending or receiving the above-mentioned first information, etc. Among them, the period for sending or receiving the above-mentioned first information can be considered as PP, and the time interval for sending or receiving the above-mentioned first information can be considered as PROP, and the PP or PROP can be considered to be the same as the transmission period of the above-mentioned at least one first PPDU, as shown in Figure 9. Exemplarily, the first indication information can include the first first PPDU sent in the above-mentioned at least one PPDU, and this application does not limit this. The above-mentioned time interval #1 can be considered as the time interval for sending or receiving the above-mentioned first information here.

可选地,上述至少一个第一PPDU中的部分或全部PPDU还可以包括发送站点的ID信息、接收站点的ID信息、资源分配信息、MCS信息、NSTS信息等。示例性地,该信息可以包括在上述至少一个PPDU中的第一个发送的第一PPDU,该信息的内容可以作为后面发送的第一PPDU的信息内容,本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, part or all of the at least one first PPDU may also include the ID information of the sending site, the ID information of the receiving site, resource allocation information, MCS information, NSTS information, etc. Exemplarily, the information may include the first PPDU sent first in the at least one PPDU, and the content of the information may be used as the information content of the first PPDU sent later, which is not limited in the present application.

当AP 110接收到来自AP 120的上述第一信息,AP 110不改变业务传输的信道,但是降低业务传输的参数。When AP 110 receives the above-mentioned first information from AP 120, AP 110 does not change the channel for service transmission, but reduces the parameters for service transmission.

上述业务传输方法800的第一种场景的第一站点与第二站点分别属于不同的BSS,下述第二种场景的第一站点与第二站点属于相同的BSS,示例性地,下述第二种场景以BSS1中的STA 111为第一站点、BSS1中的STA 112为第二站点为例进行描述。此时,第二种场景对应的上述第三站点与上述第四站点均为BSS1中的上述AP 110。此时可以认为是BSS1中的STA 112需要向BSS1中的AP 110传输超低时延的业务数据包,STA 112想要占用STA 111与BSS1中的AP 110进行非低时延的业务数据包传输的信道,因此STA 112可以向STA 111发送占先信号。The first station and the second station of the first scenario of the above-mentioned service transmission method 800 belong to different BSSs respectively, and the first station and the second station of the following second scenario belong to the same BSS. For example, the following second scenario is described by taking STA 111 in BSS1 as the first station and STA 112 in BSS1 as the second station. At this time, the above-mentioned third station and the above-mentioned fourth station corresponding to the second scenario are both the above-mentioned AP 110 in BSS1. At this time, it can be considered that STA 112 in BSS1 needs to transmit ultra-low latency service data packets to AP 110 in BSS1, and STA 112 wants to occupy the channel for STA 111 and AP 110 in BSS1 to transmit non-low latency service data packets, so STA 112 can send a preemptive signal to STA 111.

如图11所示,业务传输的方法800的第二种场景在发生占先前,STA 111与AP 110在BSS1的主信道与BSS1的次信道(或者,非主信道)上传输至少一个第一PPDU;在发生占先后,STA 111与AP 110在BSS1的主信道与BSS1的次信道(或者,非主信道)上传输至少一个第二PPDU。并且在发生占先后,STA 112与AP 110也在BSS1的主信道与BSS1的次信道(或者,非主信道)上传输至少一个第三PPDU。此处的BSS1的主信道与BSS1的次信道是上述第一信道的一例。As shown in FIG. 11 , in the second scenario of the service transmission method 800 , before the occurrence of occupation, STA 111 and AP 110 transmit at least one first PPDU on the primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel (or non-primary channel) of BSS1; before the occurrence of occupation, STA 111 and AP 110 transmit at least one second PPDU on the primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel (or non-primary channel) of BSS1. And before the occurrence of occupation, STA 112 and AP 110 also transmit at least one third PPDU on the primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel (or non-primary channel) of BSS1. The primary channel of BSS1 and the secondary channel of BSS1 here are examples of the first channel mentioned above.

第二种场景的其他内容可以参照上述第一种场景的内容,此处不再赘述。The rest of the second scenario can refer to the first scenario mentioned above and will not be repeated here.

当存在占先传输时,本申请实施例所提供的上述业务传输的方法800可以通过降低原先业务的传输参数或降低占先业务的传输参数,既可以保持原先传输不中断,又可以降低对占先业务的影响。上述业 务传输的方法800在发生占先后,AP 110在第一信道上传输至少一个第二PPDU,使得AP 120在进行信道竞争时认为第一信道忙碌,AP 120可能无法在第一信道上进行至少一个第三PPDU的传输。When there is a preemptive transmission, the method 800 for transmitting the service provided in the embodiment of the present application can reduce the transmission parameters of the original service or reduce the transmission parameters of the preemptive service, thereby maintaining the original transmission without interruption and reducing the impact on the preemptive service. In the method 800 for transmitting a service, AP 110 transmits at least one second PPDU on the first channel before the preemption occurs, so that AP 120 considers that the first channel is busy during channel contention, and AP 120 may not be able to transmit at least one third PPDU on the first channel.

基于以上问题,本申请提出一种解决方法:AP 120在进行信道竞争时,采用较高的空信道检测(clear channel assessment,CCA)门限值来判断第一信道是否空闲。例如,设置进行信道竞争的CCA门限值高于第一阈值或设置较高的CCA门限值。Based on the above problems, the present application proposes a solution: when performing channel contention, the AP 120 uses a higher clear channel assessment (CCA) threshold value to determine whether the first channel is idle. For example, the CCA threshold value for channel contention is set higher than the first threshold value or a higher CCA threshold value is set.

具体地,上述CCA门限值或上述第一阈值可以通过以下三种方式确定:Specifically, the CCA threshold value or the first threshold value may be determined in the following three ways:

方式一:上述AP 110发送的上述至少一个第一PPDU携带第六指示信息,该第六指示信息用于指示上述CCA门限值或者上述第一阈值,或者,该第六指示信息携带在该至少一个第一PPDU中的部分第一PPDU中,或者,该第六指示信息携带在AP 110发送的其它无线帧(例如信标帧或探测响应帧等)中。AP 120可以监听到AP 110发送的至少一个第一PPDU、其它无线帧等。Mode 1: The at least one first PPDU sent by the AP 110 carries sixth indication information, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the CCA threshold value or the first threshold value, or the sixth indication information is carried in part of the at least one first PPDU, or the sixth indication information is carried in other wireless frames (such as beacon frames or probe response frames, etc.) sent by the AP 110. The AP 120 can monitor the at least one first PPDU, other wireless frames, etc. sent by the AP 110.

方式二:上述CCA门限值或上述第一阈值可以是预定义的。Mode 2: the CCA threshold value or the first threshold value may be predefined.

示例性地,可以提前预定义CCA门限值或上述第一阈值。Exemplarily, the CCA threshold value or the first threshold value mentioned above may be predefined in advance.

方式三:上述CCA门限值或上述第一阈值可以是AP 110与AP 120提前协商好的。Method three: The above-mentioned CCA threshold value or the above-mentioned first threshold value can be negotiated in advance between AP 110 and AP 120.

示例性地,AP 120与AP 120之间建立占先协议。AP 120向AP 110发送交互请求帧,用于请求进行信道竞争的CCA门限值或上述第一阈值;AP 110向AP 120发送响应帧,用于指示CCA门限值或上述第一阈值。Exemplarily, a preemptive protocol is established between AP 120 and AP 120. AP 120 sends an interaction request frame to AP 110 to request a CCA threshold value or the first threshold value for channel contention; AP 110 sends a response frame to AP 120 to indicate the CCA threshold value or the first threshold value.

通过设置较高的CCA门限值或设置该CCA门限值高于某一阈值,可以提高占先站点使用与发送站点相同的信道进行占先业务传输时的信道竞争的成功率。By setting a higher CCA threshold value or setting the CCA threshold value higher than a certain threshold value, the success rate of channel contention when the preemptive station uses the same channel as the sending station to perform preemptive service transmission can be improved.

上述业务传输的方法800是其它站点对发送站点的占先,本申请还可以提供另一种业务传输的方法900,可以降低发送站点自身的占先对发送站点的原有传输的影响。图12所示的该业务传输的方法900中的发送站点在检测到发送站点新到达的缓存数据包中有超低时延要求的业务数据包,发送站点仍然使用原先的信道进行原先业务的传输,并且允许发送站点的超低时延要求的业务数据包在该信道上的传输。但是发送站点需要降低原先业务传输的功率或MCS,从而降低对占先传输的影;或者,占先站点需要降低占先业务传输的功率或MCS,从而降低对原先业务的影响。该业务传输的方法900与上述业务传输的方法800的主要区别在于:无需执行上述步骤S812并且上述至少一个第一PPDU、上述至少一个第二PPDU以及上述至少一个第三PPDU都是由发送站点进行传输。The above-mentioned service transmission method 800 is the preemption of the sending site by other sites. The present application can also provide another service transmission method 900, which can reduce the impact of the preemption of the sending site itself on the original transmission of the sending site. When the sending site in the service transmission method 900 shown in Figure 12 detects that there is a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements in the newly arrived cache data packet of the sending site, the sending site still uses the original channel to transmit the original service, and allows the service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements of the sending site to be transmitted on the channel. However, the sending site needs to reduce the power or MCS of the original service transmission to reduce the impact on the preemptive transmission; or, the preemptive site needs to reduce the power or MCS of the preemptive service transmission to reduce the impact on the original service. The main difference between the service transmission method 900 and the above-mentioned service transmission method 800 is that: there is no need to perform the above-mentioned step S812 and the above-mentioned at least one first PPDU, the above-mentioned at least one second PPDU and the above-mentioned at least one third PPDU are all transmitted by the sending site.

图12是本申请实施例的业务传输方法900的示意性流程图。该业务传输的方法900包括:FIG12 is a schematic flow chart of a service transmission method 900 according to an embodiment of the present application. The service transmission method 900 includes:

步骤S910,第一站点基于第一参数使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU。In step S910 , the first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using a first channel based on a first parameter.

步骤S912,当第一站点检测新到达的缓存数据包中有超低时延要求的业务数据包,第一站点基于第二参数使用上述第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,并基于第三参数使用上述第一信道传输至少一个第三PPDU。Step S912, when the first site detects that there is a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements in the newly arrived cached data packets, the first site uses the above-mentioned first channel to transmit at least one second PPDU with the third site based on the second parameters, and uses the above-mentioned first channel to transmit at least one third PPDU based on the third parameters.

具体地,上述第一参数包括第一站点传输上述至少一个第一PPDU的功率或第一站点传输上述至少一个第一PPDU的MCS,上述第二参数包括第一站点传输上述至少一个第二PPDU的功率或第一站点传输上述至少一个第二PPDU的MCS。其中,该第二参数所表示的功率低于第一参数所表示的功率,或者,该第二参数所表示的MCS低于第一参数所表示的MCS。Specifically, the first parameter includes the power of the first site transmitting the at least one first PPDU or the MCS of the first site transmitting the at least one first PPDU, and the second parameter includes the power of the first site transmitting the at least one second PPDU or the MCS of the first site transmitting the at least one second PPDU. The power represented by the second parameter is lower than the power represented by the first parameter, or the MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter.

其中,上述MCS包括编码率(code rate)和/或调制阶数(modulation order),上述第二参数所表示的MCS低于第一参数所表示的MCS包括:上述第二参数所表示的编码率低于第一参数所表示的编码率和/或上述第二参数所表示的调制阶数低于第一参数所表示的调制阶数。对于调制以及编码率更进一步的描述可以参照上述业务传输方法800的相关内容,此处不再赘述。The MCS includes a code rate and/or a modulation order, and the MCS represented by the second parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter, including: the code rate represented by the second parameter is lower than the code rate represented by the first parameter and/or the modulation order represented by the second parameter is lower than the modulation order represented by the first parameter. For further description of modulation and code rate, reference may be made to the relevant contents of the service transmission method 800, which will not be repeated here.

具体地,上述第三参数包括第一站点传输上述至少一个第三PPDU的功率或第一站点传输上述至少一个第三PPDU的MCS。其中,该第三参数所表示的功率低于第一参数所表示的功率,或者,该第三参数所表示的MCS低于第一参数所表示的MCS。Specifically, the third parameter includes the power of the first site transmitting the at least one third PPDU or the MCS of the first site transmitting the at least one third PPDU, wherein the power represented by the third parameter is lower than the power represented by the first parameter, or the MCS represented by the third parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter.

其中,上述MCS包括编码率(code rate)和/或调制阶数(modulation order),上述第三参数所表示的MCS低于第一参数所表示的MCS包括:上述第三参数所表示的编码率低于第一参数所表示的编码率和/或上述第三参数所表示的调制阶数低于第一参数所表示的调制阶数。对于调制以及编码率更进一步的描述可以参照上述业务传输方法800的相关内容,此处不再赘述。The MCS includes a code rate and/or a modulation order, and the MCS represented by the third parameter is lower than the MCS represented by the first parameter, including: the code rate represented by the third parameter is lower than the code rate represented by the first parameter and/or the modulation order represented by the third parameter is lower than the modulation order represented by the first parameter. For further description of modulation and code rate, reference may be made to the relevant contents of the service transmission method 800, which will not be repeated here.

示例性地,上述至少一个第三PPDU可以是第一站点与第四站点传输的超低时延要求的业务数据包,该业务传输方法900中的第四站点可以是该业务传输方法900中的第三站点,或者,该第四站点可以是 可以与第一站点进行数据交互的其它站点,本申请对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the at least one third PPDU may be a service data packet with ultra-low latency requirements transmitted by the first station and the fourth station, and the fourth station in the service transmission method 900 may be the third station in the service transmission method 900, or the fourth station may be This application does not limit other sites that can interact with the first site for data.

具体地,对于TXOP级别的占先来说,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU过程中剩余的PPDU,第一站点在接收到第一信息后使用第一信道继续传输至少一个第二PPDU。或者,上述至少一个第二PPDU可以是第一站点在接收到第一信息后使用第一信道传输的新业务的PPDU。对于PPDU级别的占先来说,第一站点在传输至少一个第一PPDU的过程中中断了最后一个第一PPDU的传输,第一站点在接收到第一信息后使用第一信道重新传输被中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输剩余的PPDU或新业务的PPDU。该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及继续传输的剩余的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU,或者,该被重新传输的中断的最后一个第一PPDU以及新业务的PPDU可以认为是上述至少一个第二PPDU。Specifically, for TXOP-level preemption, the at least one second PPDU may be the remaining PPDU of the first station during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station continues to transmit the at least one second PPDU using the first channel after receiving the first information. Alternatively, the at least one second PPDU may be the PPDU of a new service transmitted by the first station using the first channel after receiving the first information. For PPDU-level preemption, the first station interrupts the transmission of the last first PPDU during the transmission of at least one first PPDU, and the first station retransmits the interrupted last first PPDU and continues to transmit the remaining PPDU or the PPDU of the new service using the first channel after receiving the first information. The retransmitted interrupted last first PPDU and the continued transmission of the remaining PPDU may be considered as the at least one second PPDU, or the retransmitted interrupted last first PPDU and the PPDU of the new service may be considered as the at least one second PPDU.

通过上述业务传输方法900,当第一站点有超低时延的业务需要传输时,无需等待当前的业务传输完成才可以进行传输,可以立即执行超低时延的业务数据包的传输,提升业务体验。Through the above-mentioned service transmission method 900, when the first site has an ultra-low latency service to be transmitted, there is no need to wait for the current service transmission to be completed before transmission can be performed. The transmission of ultra-low latency service data packets can be executed immediately, thereby improving the service experience.

最后对本申请实施例的装置实施例进行介绍。Finally, the device embodiment of the embodiment of the present application is introduced.

为了实现本申请提供的方法中的各功能,终端设备、网络设备均可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块,以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。In order to implement the functions in the method provided in this application, the terminal device and the network device may include a hardware structure and/or a software module, and implement the above functions in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. Whether one of the above functions is executed in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.

图13是本申请实施例的通信装置1100的示意框图。通信装置1100包括处理器1110和通信接口1120,处理器1110和通信接口1120可以通过总线1130相互连接。通信装置1100可以是第一站点,也可以是第二站点。13 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1100 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1100 includes a processor 1110 and a communication interface 1120, and the processor 1110 and the communication interface 1120 may be interconnected via a bus 1130. The communication device 1100 may be a first site or a second site.

可选地,通信装置1100还可以包括存储器1140。存储器1140包括但不限于是随机存储记忆体(random access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read only memory,EPROM)、或便携式只读存储器(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM),该存储器1140用于存储相关指令及数据。Optionally, the communication device 1100 may further include a memory 1140. The memory 1140 includes, but is not limited to, a random access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), or a portable read-only memory (CD-ROM), and the memory 1140 is used to store relevant instructions and data.

处理器1110可以是一个或多个中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)。在处理器1110是一个CPU的情况下,该CPU可以是单核CPU,也可以是多核CPU。The processor 1110 may be one or more central processing units (CPUs). In the case where the processor 1110 is a CPU, the CPU may be a single-core CPU or a multi-core CPU.

当通信装置1100是第一站点,示例性地,该通信装置1100用于执行以下操作:接收来自第二站点的第一信息等。When the communication device 1100 is a first site, illustratively, the communication device 1100 is used to perform the following operations: receiving first information from a second site, etc.

当通信装置1100是第二站点,示例性地,该通信装置1100用于执行以下操作:向第一站点发送第一信息等。When the communication device 1100 is the second site, illustratively, the communication device 1100 is used to perform the following operations: sending first information to the first site, etc.

上述所述内容仅作为示例性描述。通信装置1100是第一站点/第二站点时,其将负责执行前述方法实施例中与第一站点/第二站点相关的方法或者步骤。The above contents are only exemplary descriptions. When the communication device 1100 is the first site/the second site, it will be responsible for executing the methods or steps related to the first site/the second site in the above method embodiments.

上述描述仅是示例性描述。具体内容可以参见上述方法实施例所示的内容。图13中的各个操作的实现还可以对应参照图2至图12所示的方法实施例的相应描述。The above description is only an exemplary description. For specific content, please refer to the content shown in the above method embodiment. The implementation of each operation in Figure 13 can also correspond to the corresponding description of the method embodiment shown in Figures 2 to 12.

图14是本申请实施例的通信装置1200的示意框图。通信装置1200可以为第一站点或第二站点,也可以为第一站点或第二站点中的芯片或模块,用于实现上述实施例涉及的方法。通信装置1200包括收发单元1210。下面对该收发单元1210和处理单元1220进行示例性地介绍。FIG14 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1200 may be a first site or a second site, or may be a chip or module in the first site or the second site, for implementing the method involved in the above embodiment. The communication device 1200 includes a transceiver unit 1210. The transceiver unit 1210 and the processing unit 1220 are exemplarily introduced below.

收发单元1210可以包括发送单元和接收单元。发送单元用于执行通信装置1200的发送动作,接收单元用于执行通信装置1200的接收动作。为便于描述,本申请实施例将发送单元与接收单元合为一个收发单元。在此做统一说明,后文不再赘述。The transceiver unit 1210 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit. The sending unit is used to perform the sending action of the communication device 1200, and the receiving unit is used to perform the receiving action of the communication device 1200. For ease of description, the embodiment of the present application combines the sending unit and the receiving unit into one transceiver unit. A unified description is given here, and no further description is given later.

当通信装置1200是第一站点,示例性地,收发单元1210接收来自第二站点的第一信息,处理单元1220用于使用上述第二信道传输上述至少一个第二PPDU。When the communication device 1200 is a first station, illustratively, the transceiver unit 1210 receives first information from a second station, and the processing unit 1220 is configured to transmit the at least one second PPDU using the second channel.

当通信装置1200是第二站点,示例性地,收发单元1210用于向第一站点发送第一信息,处理单元1220用于使用第三信道传输上述至少一个第三PPDU。When the communication device 1200 is the second site, illustratively, the transceiver unit 1210 is used to send the first information to the first site, and the processing unit 1220 is used to transmit the at least one third PPDU using the third channel.

上述所述内容仅作为示例性描述。通信装置1200是第一站点或第二站点时,其将负责执行前述方法实施例中与第一站点或第二站点相关的方法或者步骤。The above contents are only exemplary descriptions. When the communication device 1200 is the first station or the second station, it will be responsible for executing the methods or steps related to the first station or the second station in the above method embodiments.

可选地,通信装置1200还包括存储单元1230,该存储单元1230用于存储用于执行前述方法的程序或者代码。 Optionally, the communication device 1200 further includes a storage unit 1230, where the storage unit 1230 is used to store a program or code for executing the aforementioned method.

图13和图14所示的装置实施例是用于实现图2至图12所述的内容。图13和图14所示装置的具体执行步骤与方法可以参见前述方法实施例所述的内容。The device embodiments shown in Figures 13 and 14 are used to implement the contents described in Figures 2 to 12. The specific execution steps and methods of the devices shown in Figures 13 and 14 can refer to the contents described in the above method embodiments.

图15是本申请实施例的通信装置1300的示意框图。通信装置1300用于实现第一站点/第二站点的功能。通信装置1300可以是第一站点/第二站点中的芯片。Fig. 15 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1300 is used to implement the functions of the first site/the second site. The communication device 1300 may be a chip in the first site/the second site.

通信装置1300包括:输入输出接口1320和处理器1310。输入输出接口1320可以是输入输出电路。处理器1310可以是信号处理器、芯片,或其他可以实现本申请方法的集成电路。其中,输入输出接口1320用于信号或数据的输入或输出。The communication device 1300 includes: an input/output interface 1320 and a processor 1310. The input/output interface 1320 may be an input/output circuit. The processor 1310 may be a signal processor, a chip, or other integrated circuit that can implement the method of the present application. The input/output interface 1320 is used for inputting or outputting signals or data.

举例来说,当通信装置1300为第一站点时,输入输出接口1320用于接收来自第一站点的第一信息。处理器1310用于使用第二信道传输至少一个第二PPDU。For example, when the communication device 1300 is a first station, the input/output interface 1320 is configured to receive first information from the first station. The processor 1310 is configured to transmit at least one second PPDU using a second channel.

举例来说,通信装置1300为第二站点时,输入输出接口1320用于向第一站点发送第一信息。处理器1310用于使用第三信道传输至少一个第三PPDU。For example, when the communication device 1300 is a second station, the input/output interface 1320 is used to send the first information to the first station. The processor 1310 is used to transmit at least one third PPDU using a third channel.

一种可能的实现中,处理器1310通过执行存储器中存储的指令,以实现第一站点或第二站点实现的功能。In one possible implementation, the processor 1310 implements the functions implemented by the first site or the second site by executing instructions stored in the memory.

可选的,通信装置1300还包括存储器。Optionally, the communication device 1300 also includes a memory.

可选的,处理器和存储器集成在一起。Optionally, the processor and memory are integrated together.

可选的,存储器在通信装置1300之外。Optionally, the memory is outside the communication device 1300 .

一种可能的实现中,处理器1310可以为逻辑电路,处理器1310通过输入输出接口1320输入/输出消息或信令。逻辑电路可以是信号处理器、芯片,或其他可以实现本申请实施例方法的集成电路。In a possible implementation, the processor 1310 may be a logic circuit, and the processor 1310 inputs/outputs messages or signals through the input/output interface 1320. The logic circuit may be a signal processor, a chip, or other integrated circuit that can implement the method of the embodiment of the present application.

上述对于通信装置1300的描述仅是作为示例性描述,该通信装置1300能够用于执行前述实施例所述的方法,具体内容可以参见前述方法实施例的描述,在此不再赘述。The above description of the communication device 1300 is only an exemplary description. The communication device 1300 can be used to execute the method described in the above embodiment. The specific content can be found in the description of the above method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.

本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行所述存储器中存储的指令,使得安装有所述芯片的通信设备执行上述各示例中的方法。The present application also provides a chip, including a processor, for calling and executing instructions stored in a memory from the memory, so that a communication device equipped with the chip executes the methods in the above examples.

本申请还提供一种芯片,包括:输入接口、输出接口、处理器,所述输入接口、输出接口以及所述处理器之间通过内部连接通路相连,所述处理器用于执行存储器中的代码,当所述代码被执行时,所述处理器用于执行上述各示例中的方法。可选地,该芯片还包括存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或者代码。The present application also provides a chip, including: an input interface, an output interface, and a processor, wherein the input interface, the output interface, and the processor are connected via an internal connection path, and the processor is used to execute the code in the memory, and when the code is executed, the processor is used to execute the method in each of the above examples. Optionally, the chip also includes a memory, and the memory is used to store computer programs or codes.

本申请还提供一种处理器,用于与存储器耦合,用于执行上述各实施例中任一实施例中涉及网络设备或者终端设备的方法和功能。The present application also provides a processor, which is coupled to a memory and is used to execute the methods and functions involving a network device or a terminal device in any of the above embodiments.

本申请提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,前述实施例的方法得以实现。The present application provides a computer program product including instructions. When the computer program product is run on a computer, the method of the above embodiment is implemented.

本申请还提供一种计算机程序,当该计算机程序在计算机中被运行时,前述实施例的方法得以实现。The present application also provides a computer program. When the computer program is executed in a computer, the method of the above embodiment is implemented.

本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现前述实施例所述的方法。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the method described in the above embodiment is implemented.

本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.

所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅是示意性的,例如,单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In several embodiments provided in the present application, the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. For example, multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.

作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本申请实施例的技术方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application.

另外,本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理 存在,也可以二个或二个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can be physically separate. It is possible for two or more units to be integrated into one unit.

功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个方法实施例的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of each method embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: various media that can store program codes, such as USB flash drives, mobile hard drives, ROM, RAM, magnetic disks, or optical disks.

以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above is only a specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art who is familiar with the present technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, which should be included in the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (35)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises: 第一站点使用第一信道与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU;The first station transmits at least one first PPDU with the third station using the first channel; 所述第一站点接收第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示第二站点请求进行业务传输;The first site receives first information, where the first information is used to indicate that the second site requests to perform service transmission; 所述第一站点使用第二信道与所述第三站点传输至少一个第二PPDU,所述第二信道是所述第一信道的一部分。The first station transmits at least one second PPDU with the third station using a second channel, the second channel being a portion of the first channel. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:The method according to claim 1, wherein the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information: 所述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、所述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收所述第一信息的周期,发送或接收所述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与所述至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,所述第一PPDU与所述第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,所述第一站点接收第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that when the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, there is a first time interval between the first PPDU and the second PPDU, and the first station receives the first information, comprising: 所述第一站点在所述第一时间间隔接收所述第一信息。The first station receives the first information at the first time interval. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述至少一个第一PPDU的数量或所述至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,所述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与所述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间存在第一时间间隔,所述第一站点接收第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that when the number of the at least one first PPDU or the number of the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, there is a first time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the first station receives the first information, comprising: 所述第一站点在所述第一时间间隔接收所述第一信息。The first station receives the first information at the first time interval. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一时间间隔还包括第二时间和第三时间,所述第二时间用于所述第一站点从发送状态切换为接收状态,所述第三时间用于所述第一站点从接收状态切换为发送状态,所述第一站点在所述第一时间间隔接收所述第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 3 or 4 is characterized in that the first time interval also includes a second time and a third time, the second time is used for the first station to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, the third time is used for the first station to switch from a receiving state to a sending state, and the first station receives the first information in the first time interval, comprising: 所述第一站点在所述第一时间间隔中除所述第二时间和所述第三时间之外的时间间隔接收所述第一信息。The first station receives the first information at a time interval other than the second time and the third time in the first time interval. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一站点接收所述第一信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that the first station receives the first information, comprising: 所述第一站点在第四信道上接收到所述第一信息,所述第四信道是所述第一信道的一部分;The first station receives the first information on a fourth channel, the fourth channel being a part of the first channel; 所述方法还包括:The method further comprises: 所述第一站点确定所述第一信道中除所述第四信道之外的信道为所述第二信道。The first station determines channels other than the fourth channel among the first channels as the second channels. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四信道处于所述第一信道的高频段部分,或者,所述第四信道处于所述第一信道的低频段部分,或者,所述第四信道的带宽小于或等于所述第一信道的带宽的一半。The method according to claim 6 is characterized in that the fourth channel is in the high frequency band part of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band part of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一站点的主信道与所述第二站点的主信道相同时,所述第一站点接收所述第一信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that when the primary channel of the first station is the same as the primary channel of the second station, the first station receiving the first information comprises: 所述第一站点在所述主信道接收到所述第一信息;The first station receives the first information on the primary channel; 所述方法还包括:The method further comprises: 所述第一站点发送第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示切换所述第一站点的主信道,所述第二信道包括切换之后的所述第一站点的主信道。The first site sends second information, where the second information is used to indicate switching of a primary channel of the first site, and the second channel includes the primary channel of the first site after switching. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息还用于指示切换之后的所述第一站点的主信道。The method according to claim 8 is characterized in that the second information is also used to indicate the primary channel of the first site after switching. 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二PPDU包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二信道。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that the at least one second PPDU includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息还用于指示所述第二站点请求使用第三信道,所述第三信道是所述第一信道的一部分。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that the first information is also used to indicate that the second station requests to use a third channel, and the third channel is a part of the first channel. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第三信道是根据所述第一信道预定义的。The method according to claim 11, characterized in that the third channel is predefined based on the first channel. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第一PPDU包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示第三信道,所述第三信道用于所述第二站点传输至少一个第三PPDU。The method according to claim 11 is characterized in that the at least one first PPDU includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate a third channel, and the third channel is used for the second site to transmit at least one third PPDU. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一站点向所述第二站点发送第四信息,所述第四信息用于指示所述第三信道的配置信息。 The first station sends fourth information to the second station, where the fourth information is used to indicate configuration information of the third channel. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一站点接收第三信息,所述第三信息用于请求所述第三信道的配置信息。The first station receives third information, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises: 第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于指示所述第二站点请求进行业务传输;The second site sends first information to the first site, where the first information is used to indicate that the second site requests service transmission; 所述第二站点使用第三信道传输至少一个第三PPDU,所述第三信道是第一信道的一部分,所述第一信道用于所述第一站点与第三站点传输至少一个第一PPDU。The second station transmits at least one third PPDU using a third channel, where the third channel is a part of a first channel, and the first channel is used for the first station and the third station to transmit at least one first PPDU. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第一PPDU包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示以下至少一项信息:The method according to claim 16, wherein the at least one first PPDU includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following information: 所述至少一个第一PPDU的发送周期、所述至少一个第一PPDU的长度、发送或接收所述第一信息的周期,发送或接收所述第一信息的时间间隔。The sending period of the at least one first PPDU, the length of the at least one first PPDU, the period of sending or receiving the first information, and the time interval of sending or receiving the first information. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 16 or 17, characterized in that the second station sends the first information to the first station, comprising: 所述第二站点在第一时间间隔发送所述第一信息,The second station sends the first information at a first time interval, 当所述至少一个第一PPDU的数量与至少一个第二PPDU的数量为1时,所述第一时间间隔是所述第一PPDU与所述第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,所述第二PPDU是所述第一站点与所述第三站点在第二信道上传输的PPDU,所述第二信道为所述第一信道的一部分。When the number of the at least one first PPDU and the number of the at least one second PPDU are 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the first PPDU and the second PPDU, the second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on a second channel, and the second channel is a part of the first channel. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 16 or 17, characterized in that the second station sends the first information to the first station, comprising: 所述第二站点在第一时间间隔发送所述第一信息,The second station sends the first information at a first time interval, 当所述至少一个第一PPDU的数量或至少一个第二PPDU的数量大于1时,所述第一时间间隔是所述至少一个第一PPDU的最后一个第一PPDU与所述至少一个第二PPDU的第一个第二PPDU之间的时间间隔,所述至少一个第二PPDU是所述第一站点与所述第三站点在第二信道上传输的PPDU,所述第二信道为所述第一信道的一部分。When the number of the at least one first PPDU or the number of the at least one second PPDU is greater than 1, the first time interval is the time interval between the last first PPDU of the at least one first PPDU and the first second PPDU of the at least one second PPDU, and the at least one second PPDU is a PPDU transmitted by the first site and the third site on a second channel, and the second channel is part of the first channel. 根据权利要求18或19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二站点在所述第一时间间隔发送所述第一信息,包括:The method according to claim 18 or 19, wherein the second station sends the first information at the first time interval, comprising: 所述第二站点在所述第一时间间隔中除第二时间和第三时间之外的时间间隔发送所述第一信息,所述第二时间用于所述第一站点从发送状态切换为接收状态,所述第三时间用于所述第一站点从接收状态切换为发送状态。The second station sends the first information at a time interval other than a second time and a third time in the first time interval, the second time is used for the first station to switch from a sending state to a receiving state, and the third time is used for the first station to switch from a receiving state to a sending state. 根据权利要求18至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二站点向第一站点发送第一信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 18 to 20, characterized in that the second station sends the first information to the first station, comprising: 所述第二站点在第四信道上向所述第一站点发送所述第一信息。The second station sends the first information to the first station on a fourth channel. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四信道处于所述第一信道中的高频段部分,或者,所述第四信道处于所述第一信道中的低频段部分,或者,所述第四信道的带宽小于或等于所述第一信道的带宽的一半。The method according to claim 21 is characterized in that the fourth channel is in the high frequency band part of the first channel, or the fourth channel is in the low frequency band part of the first channel, or the bandwidth of the fourth channel is less than or equal to half of the bandwidth of the first channel. 根据权利要求18至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述第一站点的主信道与所述第二站点的主信道相同时,所述第二站点向所述第一站点发送所述第一信息,包括:The method according to any one of claims 18 to 20, characterized in that when the primary channel of the first site is the same as the primary channel of the second site, the second site sending the first information to the first site comprises: 所述第二站点在所述主信道上向所述第一站点发送所述第一信息;The second station sends the first information to the first station on the primary channel; 所述方法还包括:The method further comprises: 所述第二站点接收来自所述第一站点的第二信息,所述第二信息用于指示切换所述第一站点的主信道,所述第二信道包括切换之后的所述第一站点的主信道。The second station receives second information from the first station, where the second information is used to instruct switching of a primary channel of the first station, and the second channel includes the primary channel of the first station after switching. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二信息还用于指示切换之后的所述第一站点的主信道。The method according to claim 23 is characterized in that the second information is also used to indicate the primary channel of the first site after switching. 根据权利要求18至24中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第二PPDU包括第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第二信道。The method according to any one of claims 18 to 24 is characterized in that the at least one second PPDU includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the second channel. 根据权利要求16至25中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16 to 25, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二站点根据所述第一信道确定所述第三信道。The second station determines the third channel according to the first channel. 根据权利要求16至25中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少一个第一PPDU包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第三信道。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 25 is characterized in that the at least one first PPDU includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the third channel. 根据权利要求16至25中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16 to 25, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二站点接收来自所述第一站点的第四信息,所述第四信息用于指示所述第三信道的配置信息。 The second station receives fourth information from the first station, where the fourth information is used to indicate configuration information of the third channel. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 28, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第二站点接收第三信息,所述第三信息用于请求所述第三信道的配置信息。The second station receives third information, where the third information is used to request configuration information of the third channel. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,所述处理器用于通过执行计算机程序或指令,A communication device, comprising: a processor, the processor being configured to execute a computer program or instruction, 使得所述通信装置执行权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法,或者,使得所述通信装置执行权利要求16至29中任一项所述的方法。The communication device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 15, or the communication device is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 16 to 29. 根据权利要求30所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置还包括存储器,所述存储器用于存储所述计算机程序或指令。The communication device according to claim 30 is characterized in that the communication device also includes a memory, and the memory is used to store the computer program or instruction. 根据权利要求30或31所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置还包括通信接口,所述通信接口用于输入和/或输出信号。The communication device according to claim 30 or 31 is characterized in that the communication device also includes a communication interface, and the communication interface is used to input and/or output signals. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或所述指令在计算机上运行时,A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program or instruction is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program or the instruction is executed on a computer, 使得权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法被执行;或者,so that the method of any one of claims 1 to 15 is performed; or, 使得权利要求16至29中任一项所述的方法被执行。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 29 is performed. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包含指令,当所述指令在计算机上运行时,A computer program product, characterized in that it contains instructions, when the instructions are executed on a computer, 使得权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法被执行;或者,so that the method of any one of claims 1 to 15 is performed; or, 使得权利要求16至29中任一项所述的方法被执行。The method according to any one of claims 16 to 29 is performed. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,所述通信系统包括第一站点和第二站点,所述第一站点用于执行权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法,所述第二站点用于执行权利要求16至29中任一项所述的方法。 A communication system, characterized in that the communication system comprises a first site and a second site, the first site is used to execute the method described in any one of claims 1 to 15, and the second site is used to execute the method described in any one of claims 16 to 29.
PCT/CN2024/121475 2023-10-10 2024-09-26 Service transmission method and apparatus Pending WO2025077590A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
RU2023125825 2023-10-10
RU2023125825 2023-10-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025077590A1 true WO2025077590A1 (en) 2025-04-17

Family

ID=95396490

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/121475 Pending WO2025077590A1 (en) 2023-10-10 2024-09-26 Service transmission method and apparatus

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025077590A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102196583A (en) * 2010-03-18 2011-09-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Channel resource allocation method and base station
DE102019201918A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-14 Apple Inc. Uplink puncturing the transmission to reduce interference between wireless services
CN111095856A (en) * 2019-12-04 2020-05-01 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Data processing method and device and communication equipment

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102196583A (en) * 2010-03-18 2011-09-21 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Channel resource allocation method and base station
DE102019201918A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-14 Apple Inc. Uplink puncturing the transmission to reduce interference between wireless services
CN111095856A (en) * 2019-12-04 2020-05-01 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Data processing method and device and communication equipment

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
FUJITSU: "Resource Allocation for NR V2X Sidelink Communication", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1812410, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, 2 November 2018 (2018-11-02), pages 1 - 9, XP051478610 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10841924B2 (en) Basic bandwidth device on secondary channel
US10917834B2 (en) Method for transmitting system information and related devices
CN116368916A (en) Method and device for communication
US20150098429A1 (en) Network Access Method, Device, and System
US12200764B2 (en) Method and device for managing channel occupancy duration of unlicensed frequency band
US20240015702A1 (en) Method for reselecting sidelink resource and apparatus for the same
US9622115B2 (en) Channel negotiation method, device, and system
EP3993483A1 (en) Processing method and device for beam failure
US20170347372A1 (en) Channel access based on uplink virtual queues
US20230074305A1 (en) Resource determining method, apparatus, and system
JP7193609B2 (en) DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND RELATED DEVICE
US20160165533A1 (en) Communication method, station and system
WO2022089643A1 (en) Method for adjusting enhanced distributed channel access parameter of real-time application, and communication device
WO2025077590A1 (en) Service transmission method and apparatus
WO2024140600A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus, and communication system
CN117545020A (en) Data transmission method and device, storage medium and program product thereof
WO2018236398A1 (en) METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING COMMUNICATIONS ON NON-ADJACENT SECONDARY CHANNELS IN WIRELESS LOCAL NETWORK PROTOCOLS
CN111417206B (en) Information transmission method and network side equipment
WO2015180471A1 (en) Uplink data sending method, base station, user equipment, and communication system
CN113965955B (en) A communication resource conflict selection method and related products
CN110199565B (en) Random access method, device and storage medium in unlicensed frequency band
WO2025160822A1 (en) Data transmission method, communication device, and communication system
WO2025176060A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2024188113A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024067423A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24876408

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1